PRO
OJECT
T
MAN
NUAL
Sppearmann ISD
2014
2
Im
mprovem
ments
PPROJECT
NO.
VVOLUME
001
SET
DATE
9/29/14
13-0419.0001
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PROJECT DIRECTORY
Owner:
Spearman Independent School District
403 E. 11th Ave, Spearman, TX 79081
Spearman, TX 79081
Phone: (806) 659-3233
Contact: Clay Montgomery, Superintendent, CEO
Architect
Dekker/Perich/Sabatini, LLC
500 S. Taylor Street
Lobby Box 254 – Suite 750
Amarillo, TX 79101
Phone: (806) 376-8199
Contact: Melissa Walker, AIA, LEED AP BD+C
Civil:
KSA Engineers.
600 S. Tyler, Suite 1403
Amarillo, TX 79109
Phone: (806) 335-1600
Contact: Clayton Scales, PE
Structural:
Huseman Engineering, LLC
7105 W. 34th Suite E
Amarillo, TX 79109
Phone: (806) 352-0484
Contact: Ryan Huseman, PE
Mechanical:
Brown Consulting Engineers, Inc.
3505 Olsen Blvd.
Amarillo, TX 79109
Phone: (806) 354-0141
Contact: Seth McClellan, PE
Electrical:
Brown Consulting Engineers, Inc.
3505 Olsen Blvd.
Amarillo, TX 79109
Phone: (806) 354-0141
Contact: James Hartman, PE
END OF SECTION
Project Directory - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION
SECTION TITLE
PAGES
DIVISION 0 – BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS
00 10 00
STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS
00 20 00
COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL RESPONSE FORMS
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 20 00
ALLOWANCES
01552
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION [BY KSA ENGINEERS]
01568
EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
DIVISION 2 –
02207
AGGREGATE MATERIALS [BY KSA ENGINEERS]
02504
FLEXIBLE BASE [BY KSA ENGINEERS]
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03 30 00
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE [BY HUSEMAN ENGINEERING]
03305
SITE CONCRETE [BY KSA ENGINEERS]
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
04 22 00
UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 5 – METALS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, & COMPOSITES
06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 40 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00
BUILDING INSULATION
07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
08 10 00
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 33 00
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08 71 00
FINISH HARDWARE
08 80 00
GLAZING
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09 21 60
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
09 30 00
CERAMIC TILE
09 51 20
ACOUSTIC TILE CEILINGS
09 90 00
PAINTING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 10 00
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
10 43 10
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 51 00
METAL LOCKERS
Table of Contents - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 12 00
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM
DIVISION 15 SPECIFICATIONS [BY BROWN CONSULTING ENGINEERS]
15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
15310 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
15325 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
15410 PLUMBING PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
15535 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
15775 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS
15781 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15810 DUCTS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15830 FANS
15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL [PROVIDED BY BROWN CONSULTING ENGINEERS]
Refer to Addendum #01
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 63 29
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS [BY HUSEMAN ENGINEERING
Table of Contents - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 00 50 00- OWNER/CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
The agreement between Owner and General Contractor is to be the "Owner/Contractor Agreement (AIA101-2007).
END OF SECTION
OWNER/CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
00 50 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 007200- GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions for this project are the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA201-2007).
END OF SECTION
GENERAL CONDITIONS
00 72 00 – 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Project Description.
B.
Contract.
C.
Work sequence.
D.
Use of premises.
E.
Specification format and conventions.
1.3
A.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2014 Spearman ISD-2014 Improvements:
Renovate existing facilities to provide secure entrances at both Spearman High School and Birdwell
Elementary.
Additional work includes exterior upgrades to existing canopies, renovations of the existing 5th Grade
Science Lab, Band Hall, Elementary coach’s office area, Officials locker room, and converting an existing
locker room into a new training facility.
Project also consists of a new Metal fabrication shop addition including a Metal building with a masonry
wainscoting to match the existing facility.
1.4
A.
1.5
CONTRACT
Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
WORK SEQUENCE
A.
The substantial completion date shall April 6, 2015.
B.
Submit number of calendar days from start date.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 10 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.6
A.
USE OF PREMISES
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas
in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Limits: Confine construction operations to within the boundaries of the project property.
Owner Occupancy: N/A.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to
Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking
or storage of materials.
a.
b.
B.
1.7
A.
Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage.
Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division
format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
B.
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in
the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the
sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated,
shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words
shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements
expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or
subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be
fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
01 10 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 01 20 00 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.
B.
Division 08 11 00 Metal Doors & Frames
C.
Division 08 33 00 Overhead Coiling Doors
D.
Division 08 70 00 Finish Hardware
1.02
HARDWARE ALLOWANCE:
A.
Contractor’s related costs are not included in the Contract Sum, other than the allowance itself.
B.
The change orders will include costs and reasonable overhead/profit margins.
C.
At the time of project close-out, unused amounts remaining in the signage allowance shall be credited
to owner by change order.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCE:
Provide an allowance of $9,000 for door hardware at the High School.
Provide an allowance of $4,000 for door hardware at the Elementary/JH building.
Provide an allowance of $1,000 for interior panel signage.
END OF SECTION
ALLOWANCES
01 20 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
Bidding Requirements that may be added to the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a
corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials,
equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
The cost for each alternate is the net addition to the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the
Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
B.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
2.
Costs listed for each alternate shall include costs of related coordination, modification, or
adjustment.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
1.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Alternate No. 1: Provide seal coat and re-stripe West Junior High Parking lot as indicated on Civil drawings and specifications.
END OF SECTION
ALTERNATES
01 23 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 01 60 00- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products;
special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products, and includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
A.
Substitution requests.
Basis-of-design specification.
Single source.
Product delivery, storage, and handling.
Product warranties.
Product options.
Product selection procedures.
Comparable products.
Product substitutions.
DEFINITIONS
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and
terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number
or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as
of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility,
except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated
otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where
indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that
equal or exceed those of specified product. Burden of proof of acceptability as a comparable product,
or better product, is the responsibility of the Contractor, and shall be fully investigated and
documented by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect for consideration.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required
by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named whether
accompanied or not by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation,
to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other
named manufacturers. The product named shall be used to judge the minimum standard for compliance of
any product submitted as substitution for use for the application intended. Other products will not be
approved for use on the project that are not at least equal to, or better than, the product named; as judged by
the Architect.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
01 60 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to
extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Substitution Requests: Refer to “Product Substitutions” Article. Within 30 days after the Notice To
Proceed, submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or
installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by the Architect.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
Statement indicating why specified material or product couldn’t be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of
the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation
procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified
product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter
from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in
delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract
Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
By making requests for substitution, when forwarded by the Contractor to the Architect, the
Contractor:
a.
b.
c.
Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined
that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;
Contractor and the manufacturer will provide the same, or better, guarantee for the substitution
that they would for that specified;
Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
Contract, but excludes costs under any separate contracts and the Architect’s redesign costs,
and that he waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently
becomes apparent; and;
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
01 60 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
d.
4.
Owner and Architect's Action: The Owner and Architect may reject or allow substitutions, at their
sole judgment and discretion. If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will
notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of
request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
5.
b.
1.5
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Architect does not render a decision on use of a proposed substitution
within time allocated.
Substitutions will not be considered if:
a.
B.
Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be
required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Sample submissions without
the formal Substitution Request; or
For their implementation they require a substantial revision of the Contract Documents or work
of the Owner or separate Contractors in order to accommodate their use.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use
on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously
selected products were also options.
B.
Single Source: All materials or products related to a specified warranty, system, or assembly shall be from
the same prime product manufacturer, or approved in writing by the prime product manufacturer, and
installed by the same entity; providing the Owner with a single source system warranty.
1.6
A.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that
products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight enclosure
above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and
weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
01 60 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
B.
1.7
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by
Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents, and Manufacturer’s standard warranty. Manufacturer's disclaimers
and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using
appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient
characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or
approved equal" or "or approved," or similar language, comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" and “Substitution Requests” requirements to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product
and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a.
2.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated as “no substitute”, or similar
wording.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or
"Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the
source named that complies with requirements.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
01 60 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
a.
3.
Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of
names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements.
a.
4.
6.
7.
8.
Substitutions may be considered unless otherwise indicated as “no substitute” or similar
wording.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select
a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
a.
10.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated as “no substitute”, or similar
wording.
Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products"
introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or
another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the
manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" and “Substitution Requests” to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed manufacturer’s product.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,
profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system,
provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another
manufacturer. Comply with provisions in " Comparable Products " Article.
Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-Design
Products" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the
specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and
Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the
product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use
of a product.
a.
9.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated as “no substitute”, or similar
wording.
Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a
list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements.
a.
5.
Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated as “no substitute”, or similar
wording.
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions of "Product Substitutions" for selection of a
matching product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that
complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns,
textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that does not include premium items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures"
or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product
line that includes both standard and custom or premium items.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
01 60 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.2
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Refer to “Substitution Requests”. Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected
at discretion of Architect. After 30 days, Contractor has the burden of proof that the substitution is
requested due to events or product unavailability beyond the Contractor’s control.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are
satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except
to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
A.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or
other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's
additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified, or better warranty.
Requested substitution is due to events or specified product unavailability beyond the Contractor’s
control.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required
submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified or better warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and
addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if applicable, or requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Contractor Substitution Request Form is attached.
END OF SECTION
(Substitution Request Form to Follow)
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
01 60 00 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
CONTRACTOR SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
The undersigned, as Contractor for the above project, requests that the following product be accepted for use in the
Project in lieu of
specified in Section
PRODUCT:
MODEL NO.:
MANUFACTURER:
ADDRESS:
Reason for substitution request is as follows:
The following items are attached:
1. Product description including specifications, performance and test data, and applicable reference standards.
2. Samples.
3. Tabulated comparison with specified product.
4. Documentation of reason for request.
5. Cost data for comparing proposed substitution with specified product.
6. Other:
The undersigned certifies that unless stated otherwise:
1. Proposed substitution has been thoroughly investigated and function, appearance and quality meet or
exceed that of specified product.
2. Same warranty will be provided for substitution as for specified product.
3. Use of substitution will not adversely affect:
a. Dimensions shown on Drawings.
b. Construction schedule and date of completion.
c. Work of other trades.
4. Maintenance service and replacement parts for proposed substitution will be readily available in
Albuquerque area.
5. Any changes to Contract Sum related to use of proposed substitution are included in price listed below.
Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to acceptance of substitution which may subsequently
become apparent.
6. Costs of modifying project design caused by use of proposed substitution which subsequently become
apparent will be paid for by Contractor.
If substitution request is accepted:
Contract Sum will be (decreased, increased) by $
Contract Time will be (decreased, increased) by
Submitted By:
CONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER
ADDRESS:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
NAME OF PERSON SUBMITTING REQUEST:
TITLE:
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS & SUBSTITUTIONS
calendar days
DATE:
01 60 00 - 7
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 01 77 00- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
Substantial Completion and Final Completion Inspection procedures.
2.
Warranties.
3.
Final cleaning.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and
reasons why the Work is not complete.
2.
Provide written certificate that all Work required by the Contract Documents is complete with the
exception of Work listed on the punchlist.
3.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
4.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications,
and similar documents.
5.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and
utilities. Include proof of inspection, approval tags, and Certificate of Occupancy, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
6.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
7.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label
with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
8.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
9.
Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
10. Complete startup testing of systems.
11. Submit final test/adjust/balance reports.
12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project sites, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
13. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
14. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touch-up painting.
15. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
16. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
17. Submit Application For Payment with Total Adjusted Contract Sum less cost of Work included in the
punch list.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request a minimum of 10 working days prior to the date anticipated for
inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
2.
1.4
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete
is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section 01290 "Payment
Procedures."
2.
Submit copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or
corrected (punch list) endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that
each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5.
Transmit Owner’s copy of approved submittals with submittal log as specified in Section 01330.
6.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems. Provide documentation specified in Section 01820 “Demonstration and Training”.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request a minimum of 10 working days prior to the date for final inspection.
On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete
or requires correction is completed or corrected.
1.5
A.
1.6
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PUNCH LIST)
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas
disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding to the
interior.
2.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual
walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name of Architect.
d.
Name of Contractor.
e.
Page number.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of Substantial Completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction
period.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1.
Comply with Section 01782, Operations and Maintenance Data.
D.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local
laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or
unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply
with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Final
Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including
landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
c.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior
surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
g.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,
trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible
soil or stains remain.
j.
Clean, wax and buff VCT resilient floors.
k.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass,
taking care not to scratch surfaces.
l.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess
lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
n.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from
water exposure.
o.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
p.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
q.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace
burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
r.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of
rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare and submit a report.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage
systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 4
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
Table of Contents
Section 01552 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention
Section 01568 – Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction
Section 02207 – Aggregate Materials
Section 02504 – Flexible Base
Section 03305 – Site Concrete
9/1/14
TABLE OF CONTENTS – CIVIL
KSA ENGINEERS, INC. – TBPE FIRM NO. F-1356
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
SECTION 01552
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
The work to be performed under this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials
as required or necessary for stormwater pollution prevention as shown in the plans and specified herein.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 01568 – Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
A.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for insuring that erosion of the site is kept to a
minimum.
B.
In areas of cut and fill as well as along ditch lines, the Contractor shall perform temporary grading as
necessary to insure that water is not concentrated in one area in a manner which could cause significant
erosion.
C.
If necessary in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor will be required to install erosion and
sediment control measures to prevent the loss of soil from the site and siltation of the pipes and
channels downstream from the project due to construction. Refer to the plans and Section 01568 –
Erosion and Sediment Control During Construction.
D.
In addition to the above-mentioned items, the Contractor shall also comply with any and all
applicable federal, state, and local regulations relating to water quality and stormwater runoff
including, but not limited to, the TCEQ TPDES stormwater regulations.
E.
Any permits required for the construction site under the above referenced regulations shall be
obtained by the Contractor. All responsibilities related thereto shall be placed upon the
Contractor. All costs for erosion and sedimentation control (including fees) shall be included in
the bid amount.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
[Not Used]
PART 3 EXECUTION
[Not Used]
END OF SECTION
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION
01552-1
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
SECTION 01568
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to provide erosion and sediment control for
the duration of the construction period including furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and
sediment control structures and procedures and the proper removal when no longer required.
The intent of this specification is to provide guidelines for the Contractor to adhere to all state, federal, and
local environmental regulations. It is also the intent to provide preventive measures to keep sediment from
entering any storm water system including open channels. It is the Contractor's responsibility to adhere to
all federal, state, and local requirements. While the Engineer may require the Contractor to install erosion
control devices during construction, this will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Data describing all materials incorporated into the project is required for all of the various erosion and
sediment control devices. Manufacturers’ product data sheets shall be provided for manufactured products.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction. The
specifications and the plans are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather convey the
intent to provide complete slope protection and erosion control for both the Owner’s and adjacent
property.
B.
Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and maintained
during the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to severe erosion and offsite areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be
identified and receive additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner, Engineer, or
Project Representative.
C.
All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the area to be
exposed at any one time, to minimize the time of exposure, and to minimize off-site sedimentation
damage.
D.
Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to reduce erosion and
sediment loss during the period of exposure.
E.
When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a landdisturbing activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving ditch or stream, the
Contractor shall install measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize
accelerated erosion and increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner, Engineer,
or Project Representative.
F.
The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of all sediment
once the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment is reduced by
one-half unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall also be responsible for cleaning out and
disposing of all sediment at the time of completion of the project.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-1
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
G.
1.4
Inspect all erosion and sediment control measures after each rainfall or daily during periods of
prolonged rainfall. Inspection shall occur at least once a week during rainless periods. Correct
any erosion and sediment control measures that do not conform to specifications and details.
JOB CONDITIONS
Comply with the local, state, and federal codes and ordinances. If the codes and ordinances require more
stringent or additional erosion and sediment control measures during construction than those specified or
shown on the plans, the Contractor shall provide such measures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STRAW BALES
Straw bales shall weigh a minimum of fifty pounds and shall be at least thirty inches in length. Bales shall
be composed entirely of vegetable matter and be free of seeds. Binding shall be either wire or nylon string.
Jute or cotton binding is unacceptable. Bales shall be used for no more than three months before being
replaced. However, if weather conditions cause biological degradation of the straw bales, they shall be
replaced sooner than the three month time period to prevent a loss of structural integrity of the straw bale
dike.
2.2
SILT FENCE
Provide woven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide
material. Geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principle direction (ASTM D4632),
Mullen burst strength exceeding 200 psi (ASTM D3786), and the equivalent opening size of between 20
and 50. Silt fence material shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of
six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0° F to 120° F. Silt fence shall
have galvanized welded wire mesh (12.5 gauge minimum, two inch by four inch maximum opening) as
backing to provide support. Silt fence posts shall be1.00 – 1.33 lb/linear foot steel posts.
2.3
SANDBAGS
Sandbag material shall be polypropylene, polyethylene, polyamide, or cotton burlap woven fabric with a
minimum unit weight of four ounces per square yard, a Mullen burst strength exceeding 300 psi, and
ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. Length shall be 24 to 30 inches. Width shall be 16 to 18 inches.
Thickness shall be six to eight inches. Filled sandbags shall have an approximate weight of 90 to 125
pounds. Sandbags shall be filled with coarse grade sand that is free from deleterious material. All sand
shall pass through a No. 10 sieve.
2.4
PVC PIPE
Pipe shall be SDR-35 polyvinyl chloride having a minimum nominal diameter of four inches. Pipes shall be
sized for anticipated flows in a two-year return period storm.
2.5
SOIL RETENTION BLANKET
Soil retention blankets shall consist of a geocomposite of excelsior or fiber blanket with an extruded plastic
net. The plastic net shall be photodegradable and the excelsior or fiber blanket shall be made smolder
resistant without the use of chemicals. Soil retention blankets shall be high velocity type to resist severe
runoff. Soil retention blankets shall be American Excelsior Company Curlex Blanket or Engineer approved
equal.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-2
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
2.6
2.7
ROCK FILTER DAM
A.
All aggregate used for the construction of rock filter dams shall be hard, durable, clean, opengraded, and shall naturally resist crumbling, flaking, and eroding. Aggregate gradation shall be
three to six inches for rock filter dams Types 1 and 2 and shall be four to eight inches for Type 3.
B.
The galvanized steel wire mesh for Types 2 and 3 rock filter dams shall be a minimum 20 gauge
and have 1” diameter hexagonal openings unless specified otherwise on the plans. Tie wires shall
be a minimum 20 gauge.
STABLIZED CONSTRUCTION EXIT
Aggregate used in stabilized construction exits shall be hard, durable, clean, open-graded, angular, and have
a nominal diameter of four inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
STRAW BALE DIKE
1.
Straw bales shall be embedded a minimum of four inches and securely anchored using 2"
x 2" wood stakes driven through the bales into the ground a minimum of six inches.
Straw bales are to be placed directly adjacent to one another leaving no gap between
them.
2.
Bales shall be placed in a single row lengthwise on proposed line with the ends of
adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. In swales and ditches, the barrier shall extend
to such a length that the bottoms of the end bales are higher in elevation than the top of
the lowest middle bale. Additional bales shall be placed behind the first row where the
bales abut each other. The additional bales are used to prevent unfiltered runoff from
escaping between the bales.
3.
The excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill shall conform to
ground level on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches above ground level on
the uphill side. Loose straw shall be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a
straw bale dike.
SILT FENCE
1.
Provide silt fence systems at locations specified in accordance with the drawings and as
necessary to prevent sediment from leaving the site. Silt fence shall be installed in such a
manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and
allow sediment to be retained and accumulated.
2.
Silt fence should not be used where there is a concentration of water in a channel or
drainage way or where soil conditions prevent a minimum toe-in depth of six inches or
installation of support posts to a depth of 12 inches. If concentrated flow occurs after
installation, corrective action must be taken such as placing a rock filter dam in the areas
of concentrated flow.
3.
Attach the fabric and wire backing to steel posts spaced no more than six feet apart and
embedded at least 18 inches deep. Steel posts shall have projections for fastening wire
and/or fabric.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-3
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
C.
D.
4.
Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher so that the
downstream face of the trench is vertical. The trench shall be a minimum of six inches
wide and six inches deep. Lay filter fabric and wire along the bottom and downstream
wall of the trench. Backfill and compact the trench.
5.
The filter fabric and wire backing should be provided in continuous rolls and cut to the
length of the silt fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, the fabric
and wire should only be spliced together at a support post and have at least six inches of
overlap. The joint shall be securely sealed.
6.
Unless otherwise directed, maintain the silt fence until the project is accepted by the
Owner. Remove promptly in an appropriate manner when directed by the Owner.
7.
Remove and dispose of sediment deposits off-site. Off-site disposal will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into streams or
drainage ways. If sediment has been contaminated, it shall be disposed of in accordance
with local, state, and federal regulations.
8.
Inspection of silt fences shall occur after each rainfall or daily during periods of
prolonged rainfall. Inspection shall occur at least once a week during dry periods. Repair
or replace damaged sections immediately to bring the silt fence back into compliance with
the plans and specifications. Sediment deposits shall be removed when they reach onethird of the height of the fence.
SANDBAG BERM
1.
The purpose of a sandbag berm is to intercept sediment-laden water from disturbed areas
such as construction in steam beds, create a detention pond, detain sediment, and release
water in sheet flow.
2.
A temporary sandbag berm shall be installed across a channel or right of way in a
disturbed area and should be used when the contributing drainage area is greater than 5
acres. The berm shall be a minimum height of 18 inches measured from the top of the
existing ground at the upslope toe to the top of the berm. The berm shall be sized to have
a minimum width of 48 inches measured at the bottom of the berm and 18 inches
measured at the top of the berm.
3.
The sandbag berm shall be inspected after each rain or daily during periods of prolonged
rainfall. The sandbags shall be reshaped or replaced as needed. Additional inspections
shall be made weekly during dry periods. When the silt depth reaches six inches, the
accumulated silt shall be removed and disposed of at an approved site in a manner that
will not contribute to additional sedimentation. The sandbag berm shall be left in place
until all upstream areas are stabilized and accumulated silt is removed.
SOIL RETENTION BLANKET
1.
A soil retention blanket is a geotextile or biodegradable fabric placed over disturbed areas
to limit the effects of erosion due to rainfall impact and runoff across barren soil. Soil
retention blankets are manufactured by a wide variety of vendors addressing a wide
variety of conditions such as vegetation establishment and high velocity flow. Blankets
are used in areas which are difficult to stabilize such as steep slopes, drainage swales, or
high pedestrian traffic areas.
2.
The soil retention blanket, whether installed as slope protection or as flexible channel
liner, shall be placed within 24 hours after seeding or sodding operations have been
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-4
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
completed or as approved by the Engineer. Prior to placing the blanket, the area to be
covered shall be relatively free of all rocks or clods over 1-1/2 inches in maximum
dimension and all sticks or other foreign material which will prevent the close contact of
the blanket with the soil. The area shall be smooth and free of ruts, and other depressions.
If, as a result of rain, the prepared bed becomes crusted or eroded or if any eroded
places, ruts, or depressions exist for any reason, the Contractor shall be required to
rework the soil until it is smooth and to reseed or resod the area at the Contractor's
expense.
3.
E.
F.
Installation and anchorage of the soil retention blanket shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
INTERCEPTOR DIKE
1.
Install interceptor dikes at locations shown on the plans in accordance with applicable
details and specifications.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, maintain a minimum dike height of 18 inches measured from
the ground at the upslope toe to the top of the dike.
3.
Flow from dikes shall be diverted to sediment trapping devices of the types and at
locations shown on the plans. The grades for dikes shall provide positive drainage to the
outlet.
ROCK FILTER DAMS
1.
Trees, brush, stumps, and other objectionable material shall be removed and disposed of
as necessary so as not to interfere with the construction of the filter dams.
2.
The filter dams shall be constructed according to the following criteria unless otherwise
shown on the plans:
a.
b.
Type 1 (non-reinforced).
Height
18 inches minimum measured vertically from existing ground
to top of filter dam.
Top Width
2 feet minimum.
Slopes
2:1 maximum.
Type 2 (reinforced).
Height
18 inches minimum measured vertically from existing ground
to top of filter dam.
Top Width
2 feet minimum.
Slopes
2:1 maximum.
The aggregate shall be placed on the galvanized wire mesh to the lines, height,
and slopes specified without resulting in undue voids and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. The mesh shall be folded at the upstream side over the aggregate
and secured to itself on the downstream side. The mesh shall be attached to
itself with wire ties, hog rings, or as directed by the Engineer.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-5
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
c.
Type 3 (reinforced).
Height -
36 inches minimum measured vertically from existing ground
to top of filter dam.
Top Width
2 feet minimum.
Slopes
2:1 maximum.
The aggregate shall be placed on the galvanized wire mesh to the lines, height,
and slopes specified without resulting in undue voids and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. The mesh shall be folded at the upstream side over the aggregate
and secured to itself on the downstream side. The mesh shall be attached to
itself with wire ties, hog rings, or as directed by the Engineer.
G.
H.
3.
The area upstream from the filter dams shall be maintained in a condition which will
allow sediment to be removed following the runoff of a rainfall event. When the silt
reaches a depth equal to 1/3 the height of the dam or one foot, whichever is less, the
Contractor shall remove the accumulated sediment and dispose of it at an approved site in
a manner that will not contribute to additional sedimentation. The filter dams shall be
reshaped as needed and as directed by the Engineer.
4.
The filter dams shall be maintained in place until all upstream areas are adequately
stabilized. The area beneath the filter dams and area damaged by the removal process
shall then be stabilized by the Contractor using appropriate methods as approved by the
Engineer.
STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXIT
1.
The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the locations shown on the
plans and as necessary to prevent vehicles leaving the site from tracking sediment off-site.
2.
Stabilized construction exits shall be a minimum of 50 feet long, 14 feet wide, and eight
inches thick. The Contractor shall enlarge stabilized construction exits at his own
expense if necessary to prevent off-site tracking of sediment.
3.
The Contractor shall periodically add rock as necessary for the stabilized construction
exit to continue to function as intended.
4.
The stabilized construction exit and the surrounding area shall be graded as necessary to
route runoff from these areas to other erosion and sedimentation controls.
PROTECTION OF BARE AREAS
1.
Apply seeding and soil retention blanket to bare areas including new embankment areas,
fills, stripped areas, graded areas, or otherwise disturbed areas which have a grade greater
than five percent or which will be exposed for more than 30 days. Seeding shall be in
accordance with section 02270 – Seeding for Erosion Control.
2.
Bare working areas on which it is not practical or desirable to install seeding and soil
retention blankets, as determined by the Engineer, such as areas under proposed building
slabs, shall be temporarily sloped to drain at a minimum of 0.2 percent and a maximum of
five percent. These areas shall then be "trackwalked" with a crawler dozer traveling up
and down the slope to form the effect of small "terraces" with the tracks of the dozer.
Cover each area a minimum of three times.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-6
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
3.
Route runoff from the areas through the appropriate erosion and sediment control
structures.
4.
Protect earth spoil areas by "trackwalking" and silt fences.
5.
When topsoil is called for as a component of another item, conduct erosion control
practices described in this item during the topsoiling operation.
6.
a.
When topsoiling, maintain erosion and sediment control structures such as
swales, grade stabilization structures, berms, dikes, waterways, and sediment
basins.
b.
Maintain grades that have been previously established on areas to be topsoiled.
c.
After the areas to be topsoiled have been brought to grade, and immediately
prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil, the subgrade shall be loosened by
disking or by scarifying to a depth of at least two inches to permit bonding of the
topsoil to the subsoil. Compact soil by passing a bulldozer up and down the
slope, tracking over the entire surface area of the slope to create small “terraces”.
Dust Control
a.
Control dust blowing and movement on construction sites and roads to prevent
exposure of soil surfaces, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health
hazards, and to improve traffic safety.
b.
Control dust blowing by utilizing one or more of the following methods.
c.
I.
1)
Establishment of temporary vegetative cover.
2)
Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface.
3)
Irrigation by water sprinkling.
4)
Utilization of barriers such as solid board fences, snow fences, burlap
fences, crate walls, bales of hay, or similar materials.
Dust control methods shall be implemented immediately whenever dust is
observed blowing over the project site.
LOCATION OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES
1.
Locate erosion and sediment control structures as shown on the plans and as required to
prevent erosion and removal of sediment from the project site. Silt fences shall be
required for disturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. The runoff from no more than
one acre of area shall be routed through any individual silt fence installation.
2.
Install diversion dikes to divert runoff to other erosion and sediment control structures.
3.
Install silt traps at the inlet (upstream) end of drainage structures, including open
channels, through which runoff from disturbed areas or soil stockpiles/spoil areas may
drain.
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-7
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
4.
3.2
3.3
Provide an overall erosion and sediment control system which protects disturbed areas
and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. The system shall be modified by the Contractor as needed
to effectively control erosion and sediment during construction.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain erosion and sediment control structures and procedures in full working order at all times
during construction. This shall include any necessary repair or replacement of items which have
become damaged or ineffective. Remove sediment on a regular basis which accumulates in
sediment control devices and place the material in approved earth spoil areas, return the material to
the area from which it eroded, or dispose of it off-site.
B.
The Contractor shall prohibit all equipment and vehicles from maneuvering in areas outside the
dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to
erosion and sedimentation control systems shall be repaired immediately at the expense of the
Contractor.
C.
Upon completion of construction and stabilization of disturbed areas, properly remove the
temporary erosion and sediment control structures and complete the area as indicated.
D.
Soil retention blankets will not require removal if installed on a finished graded area specified to
receive seeding.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
In the event of conflict between these requirements and storm water pollution control laws, rules, or
regulations of federal, state, or local agencies, the more restrictive requirements shall apply.
END OF SECTION
EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
01568-8
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
SECTION 02207
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Aggregate materials.
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C33 – Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
B.
ASTM C136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
C.
ASTM D698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Stand Effort.
D.
ASTM D2487 – Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
E.
ASTM D2922 –Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
F.
ASTM D3017 – Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
G.
ASTM D4318 – Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
Soils.
H.
Texas Department of Transportation – Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways,
Streets, and Bridges.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit sources of materials.
B.
Submit a sieve analysis of each material to be used if requested by the Engineer.
C.
Submit a 10 lb. sample of each material to the testing laboratory in an airtight container if
requested by the Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform work in accordance with plans, specifications, and the Owner’s standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS
A.
Aggregate Type A1 - Drain Rock
1.
Drain rock shall be clean, washed, sound, durable, well-graded crushed rock, crushed
gravel, or natural stone gravel.
2.
Drain rock shall conform to ASTM C33 Size No. 3 coarse aggregate as shown in the
following table.
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
02207 - 1
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
Sieve Size
2 ½ in.
2 in.
1 ½ in.
1 in.
½ in.
B.
Aggregate Type A2 – Type 1 Pipe Embedment
1.
Type 1 pipe embedment shall be clean, washed, sound, durable, well-graded crushed
rock, crushed gravel, or natural stone gravel.
2.
Type 1 pipe embedment shall conform to ASTM C33 Size No. 57 coarse aggregate as
shown in the following table.
Sieve Size
1 ½ in.
1 in.
½ in.
No. 4
No. 8
C.
Percent Passing
(By Weight)
100
90-100
35-70
0-15
0-5
Percent Passing
(By Weight)
100
95-100
25-60
0-10
0-5
Aggregate Type A3 – Type 2 Pipe Embedment
Type 2 pipe embedment shall consist of a well-graded, angular, crushed rock with a maximum
particle size of ¾ inch. No more than 10% of the material shall pass the No. 200 sieve.
D.
E.
2.2
Aggregate Type A4 - Pea Gravel
1.
Pea gravel shall be natural gravel that is washed and free of clay, shale, and organic
matter. It shall be graded in accordance with ASTM C136 to the following limits:
2.
Minimum Size: 1/4 inch
3.
Maximum Size: 5/8 inch
Aggregate Type A5 – Flexible Base
1.
Flexible base material shall be crushed stone produced from oversize quarried aggregate,
sized by crushing, and produced from a naturally occurring single source. Crushed
gravel or uncrushed gravel shall not be acceptable. No blending of sources or additive
materials will be allowed in flexible base.
2.
Flexible base material shall conform to TxDOT Item No. 247 Type A Grade 2.
FINE AGGREGATE MATERIAL
Aggregate Type A6 - Sand
A.
Sand shall be natural river or bank sand that is free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials,
and organic matter.
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
02207 - 2
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
B.
Sand shall conform to the gradation shown in the following table.
Sieve Size
No. 4
No. 16
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
2.3
Percent Passing
(By Weight)
100
80-100
20-60
10-40
0-10
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform testing and analysis of materials in accordance with ASTM C33 and ASTM D698.
B.
If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material or material source
and retest.
C.
Provide materials of each type from one source throughout the project. A change in source
requires sampling and testing at the Contractor’s expense and approval by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
STOCKPILING
A.
Stockpile materials on site at locations designated by the Engineer.
B.
Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet project schedule and requirements.
C.
Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.
D.
Direct surface water away from stockpile site so as to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.
STOCKPILE CLEANUP
A.
Remove the stockpile. Leave the area in a clean and neat condition. Grade the site to prevent
freestanding surface water.
B.
If a borrow area is indicated, leave the area in a clean and neat condition. Grade the site to prevent
freestanding surface water.
END OF SECTION
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
02207 - 3
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
SECTION 02504
FLEXIBLE BASE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Furnishing and placing of flexible base course.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 02207 – Aggregate Materials.
REFERENCES
Texas Department of Transportation – Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and
Bridges.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit test results showing that the material proposed meets the requirements of this
specification.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Flexible base material temporarily stockpiled for construction purposes shall be located in an area
approved by the Owner.
B.
Rock riprap materials shall be stockpiled in a way that prevents their contamination with debris,
other stockpiled materials, or soil.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Flexible base material shall be Aggregate Type A5 – Flexible Base.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Excavate and shape the road bed. Remove unstable or otherwise objectionable material from the
subgrade and replace with approved material. Fill holes, ruts, and depressions with approved
material. Sprinkle the subgrade, if necessary, and reshape and roll to the extent directed in order
to place the subgrade in an acceptable condition to receive the base material. The surface of the
subgrade shall be smooth and conform to line, grade, and typical sections. Prepare sufficient
subgrade in advance to insure satisfactory prosecution of the work.
B.
Utilize material excavated in the preparation of the subgrade in the construction of adjacent
shoulders and slopes or otherwise disposed of as directed. Secure any additional material required
for the completion of the shoulders and slopes from sources indicated or designated by the
Engineer.
Place flexible base material in accordance with TxDOT Item 247 to the lines, grades, and thickness shown
on the plans.
END OF SECTION
FLEXIBLE BASE
02504-1
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
SECTION 03305
CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cast-in-place Concrete.
B.
Control, expansion, and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work including joint
sealants.
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 – Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B.
ACI 302 – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C.
ACI 304 – Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
D.
ACI 305R – Hot Weather Concreting.
E.
ACI 306R – Cold Weather Concreting.
F.
ACI 308 – Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
G.
ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
H.
ANSI/ASTM D994 – Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).
I.
ANSI/ASTM D1190 – Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type.
J.
ANSI/ASTM D1751 – Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
K.
ANSI/ASTM D1752 – Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction.
L.
ASTM B221 – Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
M.
ASTM C33 – Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
N.
ASTM C94 – Ready-Mixed Concrete.
O.
ASTM C150 – Standard Specifications for Portland Cement.
P.
ASTM C260 – Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
Q.
ASTM C330 – Light Weight Aggregates For Structural Concrete.
R.
ASTM C494 – Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete.
S.
ASTM C618 – Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture
in Portland Cement Concrete.
CONCRETE
03305-1
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit mix designs for all concrete mixes to be used on the project. Submit mix designs as shop
drawings in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals a minimum of 30 days before their use in
the project.
B.
Submit the following:
C.
1.
Product data sheets on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures, and bonding
agents.
2.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.
Test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete to be used in the project to
verify that the Specification requirements are met or exceeded.
Project Record Documents
1.
1.4
1.5
Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are
concealed from view.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Acquire cement and aggregate from the same source for all work.
C.
Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
D.
Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled in a manner to prevent deterioration,
contamination, or any other circumstances that would be harmful to cast-in-place concrete.
B.
The maximum time interval between the addition of mixing water and cement to the batch and the
placing of the concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following:
Concrete Temperature
1.6
Time to Placement
50 to 75 degrees F
90 Minutes
75 degrees to 90 degrees F
60 Minutes
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A.
Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow unless protection is provided and approved by the
Engineer.
B.
Coordinate concrete placement schedule with other related work.
C.
Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before placement.
CONCRETE
03305-2
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
1.7
COORDINATION
Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement
ASTM C150, Type I – Normal Portland type;. Only one brand of any one type of cement shall be
used for exposed concrete surfaces of any individual structure.
B.
Fine Aggregates
Aggregate meeting the requirements of ASTM C33.
C.
Coarse Aggregates
Aggregate sizes No. 467 or No. 57 according to ASTM C33 or as approved by the Engineer.
D.
Water
Potable water free from detrimental chemicals and solids that will decrease the strength of the
concrete.
E.
Curing Materials
Curing materials shall be burlap, impervious sheets, or membrane-forming compounds.
2.2
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air Entrainment
ASTM C260.
B.
Fly Ash
ASTM C618 Class F.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Vapor Barrier
Six mil thick clear polyethylene film of the type recommended for below-grade application.
B.
Non-Shrink Grout
Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, and water reducing and
plasticizing agents capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours
and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
C.
Adhesive Anchors
Two part adhesive intended for use with concrete (Hilti Hit-Hy 150 or Engineer approved equal).
CONCRETE
03305-3
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
2.4
JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A.
Joint Filler Type A
Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2 inch thick.
B.
Joint Filler Type B
One inch redwood plank with width equal to the thickness of the concrete.
C.
Sealant
One part silicone material, Dow Corning 890 SL or Engineer approved equal.
2.5
CONCRETE MIX
A.
Design Criteria
1.
Concrete shall be proportioned to give the necessary workability and strength and shall
conform to the following governing requirements:
4,000 (Class A)
Minimum
Cement
(Bags Per
Cu. Yd.)
6.5
2,000 (Class B)
4.0
Min. 28 Day
Compressive
Strength (psi)
Max. Size
of Coarse
Aggregate
Max. W/C
Ratio
Slump
(Inches)
1”
0.45
3-5
1”
0.60
3-5
Use
Reinforced Concrete
Blocking, Cradle,
Encasement, etc.
2.
All concrete shall be Class A, unless otherwise specified.
3.
In no case shall the amount of coarse material be such as to produce harshness in placing
and honeycombing in the structure.
B.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by the Engineer. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
C.
Use calcium chloride only when approved by the Engineer.
D.
Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by the Engineer.
E.
Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior. Concrete
shall have 5% ± 1% entrained air.
F.
Fly ash can make up no more than 25% of the total amount of cementitious material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing site conditions.
B.
Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
CONCRETE
03305-4
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
C.
3.2
3.3
Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with a steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B.
In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, install anchors as shown on the
plans and according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304.
B.
Do not place any concrete that has a temperature of less than 50 degrees or more than 100 degrees
F.
C.
If the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F, concrete work shall be performed in accordance
with ACI-306R. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any defective work, resulting form
freezing or injury in any manner during placing and curing, and shall replace such work at his/her
expense.
D.
Notify the Engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to the commencement of placing operations.
E.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints are not
disturbed during concrete placement.
F.
Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints a minimum of six inches and seal
watertight by taping edges and ends.
G.
Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier
material. Overlap damaged areas a minimum of six inches and seal watertight.
H.
Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick Type A joint filler.
I.
Place joint filler in pattern placement sequence. Set tops to required elevations. Secure to resist
movement by wet concrete.
J.
Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface.
K.
Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
L.
Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with finish.
M.
Install joint covers in one piece when adjacent construction activity is complete.
N.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
O.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
Do not interrupt successive placement. Do not permit cold joints to occur.
P.
Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing concrete. Cut 1/4 depth using a 3/16 inch thick blade.
Sawing shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without
chipping, spalling, or tearing and before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking of the pavement occurs.
CONCRETE
03305-5
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
Q.
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed with light broom finish.
B.
Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
C.
Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for the period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C.
Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
D.
If curing by ponding, maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously
for four days.
E.
If curing by spraying, spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for seven days.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Provide free access to the work and cooperate with the appointed testing firm.
C.
Submit a proposed mix design for each class of concrete for review prior to commencement of the
project.
D.
Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.
E.
Four concrete test cylinders may be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of concrete placed.
The test cylinders will be cured on-site under the same conditions as the concrete it represents.
F.
One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken and as requested by the Engineer.
PATCHING
A.
Allow the Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
B.
Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify the Engineer upon
discovery.
C.
Patch imperfections as directed.
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
CONCRETE
Defective concrete is concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances, or
specified requirements.
03305-6
2014 Improvements
Spearman ISD
B.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer.
C.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
the Engineer for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE
03305-7
Spearman ISD
2014 Improvements
Specifications Sections by:
Huseman Engineering, LLC
7105 W 34th, Suite E
(806)352-0484
Amarillo, TX 79109
TBPE Firm No.: F-13245
ryan@husemanengineering.com
03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
31 63 29: Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Footings.
Grade beams.
Slabs-on-grade.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash.
B.
W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar
arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for
concrete reinforcement.
D.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.
1.
1.5
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 1
B.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1.
1.6
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Curing compounds.
Floor and slab treatments.
Vapor retarders.
Aggregates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with
commercial building concrete installations and shall have successfully completed a minimum of 3 similar
projects.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and
that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
B.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive
days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by
ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
2.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to
total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE, GENERAL
A.
2.2
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
ACI 301.
2.
ACI 117.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth
concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1.
2.3
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.4
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square
and free of burrs.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,
plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive
strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
2.5
For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI
Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from
single manufacturer.
B.
Cementitious Materials:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 3
1.
2.
C.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type, as shown on the plan.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
1.
2.
Coarse-Aggregate: Size No. 56.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not
contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use
calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
2.6
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
2.7
Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B, except with maximum water-vapor permeance of .03
Perms [grains/(ft2*hr*in.Hg)]. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
Install according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.
2.8
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs
based on laboratory trial mixtures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 4
B.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland
cement in concrete as follows:
1.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.9
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.10
A.
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and
furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
F.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off
templates or compacting-type screeds.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 5
G.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.
H.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
I.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in
Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24
hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal
operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by
Architect.
3.4
VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Extend vapor barrier over footings and grade beams to a distance of 6 inches.
Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.
Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.
No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and
taping all sides with tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 6
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond
to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.6
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated
or as approved by Architect.
1.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete
thickness as follows:
1.
2.
D.
2.
3.7
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge
of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
1.
E.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements
of floors and slabs.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface unless otherwise indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt
coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections are completed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by
Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 7
C.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot
be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding
layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At
each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to
segregate.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formedsurface irregularities.
1.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins
and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
C.
Apply to concrete surfaces followed by a rubbed finish where exposed to public view.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where visible:
1.
D.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to
coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1
mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by
trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove
excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog
spray for at least 36 hours.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 8
3.9
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float
passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1.
C.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or
power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and
uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
2.
3.10
A.
3.11
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
Apply a trowel finish to all slab-on-grade surfaces.
Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,
freestanding, 10-ft.-long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the
surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless
otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during
curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If
removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 9
c.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair
any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.
a.
b.
c.
3.
3.12
A.
3.13
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or
a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor
covering used on Project.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace
concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
2.
C.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture
exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 10
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens
at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressivestrength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location
of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions
and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test
results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not
been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods
as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 11
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 04 22 00 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1.
Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2.
Mortar and grout.
3.
Reinforcing steel.
4.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
5.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B.
See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry.
C.
See Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in
masonry joints for metal flashing.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of
reinforced walls.
C.
Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units and colored mortars.
D.
Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties
indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations
within standards.
1.
For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
E.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency,
by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1.
Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches
high.
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing
conditions.
Comply
with
cold-weather
construction
requirements
contained
in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
B.
Hot-Weather Requirements:
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
COLORS, TEXTURES, AND PATTERNS
A.
Exposed Masonry Units: 8”x8”x16” standard CMU veneer. Color as selected by architect from
manufacturer’s full range of colors
B.
Modular Clay Masonry to match existing at high school. Provide mock up panel adjacent to existing
masonry for approval by architect and superintendent.
2.3
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A.
Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding,
and other special conditions.
B.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture
that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units and where indicated.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of
1900 psi..
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1.
Available Products:
a.
Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
b.
Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c.
Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
D.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
2.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required
mortar color.
E.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F.
Cold-Weather Admixture:
Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
1.
Available Products:
a.
Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick.
b.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
c.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
d.
Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.
G.
Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete
masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1.
Available Products:
a.
Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite.
b.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar
Admixture.
H.
Water: Potable.
2.5
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for interior walls and
hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
1.
Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
2.
Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.
3.
2.6
Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.188-inch- diameter, hot-dip
galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials:
1.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2
coating.
2.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer
but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2
inches parallel to face of veneer.
C.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.7
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated,
complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1.
Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch
out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees.
2.
Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and
out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and
down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
B.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up
to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene or PVC.
B.
Bond-Breaker Strips:
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
C.
Weep/Vent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of
head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's
standard.
a.
Products:
1)
Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.
D.
Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within
the wall cavity.
1.
Provide one the following configurations:
a.
Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep.
2.
Products:
a.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
b.
Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
2.9
Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner
manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
c.
ProSoCo, Inc.
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
C.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2
inch maximum.
2.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level
by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
3.2
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and
for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-halfsize units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond;
do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Match mortar at renovations/additions to approval of Architect and Owner. Use colored cement, added
masonry colors, specific type of sand, or method necessary to achieve best match possible to existing
structure.
F.
Do not lay masonry when temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit.
G.
Cover top of unfinished wall with tarps or mats at end of day.
H.
Prior to starting brickwork, lay up 3’x3’ sample panel for approval of brick and mortar by Architect and
Owner. Lay up as many samples as necessary. Masonry contractor is required to leave sample panel on
job site until new masonry is approved by Architect/Owner.
3.3
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
1.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
B.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint),
unless otherwise indicated.
3.4
CAVITY WALLS
A.
Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.
B.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from
cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins
protruding into cavity.
C.
Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."
3.5
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere.
Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.6
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A.
3.7
Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with
the following:
1.
Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
2.
Space anchors at intervals no greater than 32” O.C.E.W.
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A.
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage
material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to
resist grout pressure.
1.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow
inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.
B.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
C.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.
D.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
E.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780.
3.9
CLEANING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes.
2.
Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.10
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
1.
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property. Refer to waste management division 01 specifications for additional information.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
04 22 00 - 7
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 06 10 00- ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish and install blocking, backing, wood nailers, and stripping as required for securing other work.
Furnish rough hardware, miscellaneous rough carpentry and related accessories for a complete installation.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 07510 – Modified Bitumen Membrane.
B. Section 07600 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Lumber shall conform to requirements of the Uniform Building Code. Framing
lumber and plywood shall be appropriately grade marked with either West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
for lumber and the American Plywood Association for plywood.
B. Coordination: Coordinate location of wood grounds and blocking with other related trades. Other
contractors will furnish exact locations of grounds and blockings to this Contractor for proper installation of
their work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Literature: Indicating specifications and installation requirements for rough hardware items
specified, i.e., connectors, etc.
B. Certificates: Certificate of compliance that lumber has been treated with a fire retardant (furnished and
installed in "non-rot" susceptible areas) and wood preservative (furnished and installed in all rot susceptible
areas) and that lumber is of species and fiber stress specified.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials to job site in a timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress. Store materials off of
ground and protect from water, dust, dirt and weather with adequate coverings to completely enclose
materials. In the event of damage, immediately make replacements at Contractor's expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Standard Grade Hem-Fir: Non-structural furring, concealed blocking and stripping, grounds, and
miscellaneous nailers, grade marked with WWPA stamp.
B. Plywood: Structural 1 - C-D EXT-APA, sizes as indicated. Solid surface sanded, finish one side, minor
splits allowed; other side with tight knots, limited splits and stitching permitted. Plywood components
adhered with waterproof glues.
C. Fasteners:
1. Nails: Common wire nails. Use galvanized nails where rough carpentry is exposed to moisture.
Provide penetration into the place receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail
provided.
2. Bolts: ASTM A307, galvanized for exterior items and where embedded in concrete or masonry. Bolt
threads must not bear on woods; use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood; use
washers under all nuts.
3.
Screws: For lag-screws and wood-screws, holes same diameter as root of thread; enlarge holes to
shank diameter for length of shank. Screw, do not drive, all lag-screws and wood-screws.
D. Anchoring, Fastening Hardware and Miscellaneous Hardware: See SECTION 05500. METAL
FABRICATIONS.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
E. Treated Lumber:
1. Fire Retardant: Required for lumber used including blocking and nailers at roof, where noted on
drawings and where required by the Uniform Building Code. Pressure treat to flame spread rating of
25 or less and fuel contribution of 30 or less per ASTM E84, each piece bearing U.L. label of
conformance. Deliver at maximum 14 percent moisture content.
a. Product/Manufacturer:
1) DRICON Fire Retardant Treated Wood as manufactured by one of Hickson Corporation's
licensed producers.
2) PYRO-GUARD, manufactured by Hoover Universal-Wood Preserving Division, Pine Bluff,
Arkansas 71611, or acceptable substitution.
2. Rot Resistive: Required for lumber used in conjunction with the roofing system and in areas subjected
to rot or decay, or where indicated on the Drawings, and where required by Uniform Building Code.
a. Product/Manufacturer: Use one of the following or acceptable substitution.
1) Osmose 33, manufactured by Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of America, Buffalo, New York
14209
2) Dixie CCA, manufactured by Hoover Universal-Wood Preserving Division, Pine Bluff,
Arkansas 71611.
3) Wolmanized as manufactured by one of Hickson Corporation's licensed producers, or
acceptable substitution.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Materials: Provide and securely fasten wood nailing strips, plates, blocking, etc., at proper levels in metal
stud partitions, to anchor items which require use of wood blocking to fasten or support components and
accessories.
B. General Framing:
1. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Carefully select members, selecting pieces so that knots and obvious
defects will not interfere with placing bolts, nailing or making connections. Cut out and discard
defects. Lumber may be rejected by Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp,
twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
2. Nailing:
a. Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimension indicated on Nailing Schedule unless
noted otherwise.
b. Nail without splitting wood. Pre-bore as required. Replace split members at Contractor's expense.
3. Bolting: Drill holes 1/16 inch larger in diameter than bolts being used. Drill straight and true from one
side only. Bolt threads shall not bear on wood. Use washers under head and nut where both bear on
wood. Use washers under all nuts.
4. Screws: Use same technique as for bolting. Screw, do not drive lag and wood screws.
3.02 NON-STRUCTURAL LUMBER INSTALLATION:
A. Provide and securely fasten wood nailing strips, plates, blocking, etc., at proper levels in metal stud
partitions, to anchor shelving, cabinets, recessed, semi-recessed and flush mounted toilet accessories, corner
guards and other items which require use of wood blocking to fasten or support components and
accessories, and as nailers or grounds used in conjunction with roofing membrane, sheet metal and flashing
and roofing accessories. Interior lumber shall be fire-resistive treated. Lumber used in conjunction with the
roofing membrane shall be rot resistive treated.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 06 40 20
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
2.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
3.
Shop finishing interior woodwork.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
2.
Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
3.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork.
A.
DEFINITIONS
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing
woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and
finishing materials and processes.
1.4
B.
Product Data: For medium-density fiberboard, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding
plastic laminate, cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
1.
Show details full size.
2.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking
and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items
installed in architectural woodwork.
D.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface
finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
2.
Corner pieces as follows:
a.
Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches
high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
3.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 20 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
production and installation of interior architectural woodwork.
D.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork complies with
requirements of grades specified.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
B.
1.8
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been
completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions"
Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of
other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements.
Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of
Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and
installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of
woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 20 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
B.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
C.
Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or mediumdensity fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamineimpregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
D.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by
woodwork quality standard.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering highpressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a.
Nevamar.
b.
Laminart.
c.
Formica.
E.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Un-pigmented contact cement.
A.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except
for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products).
2.2
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or
items referenced to this standard.
C.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening.
D.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
F.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.
G.
Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings,
BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:
1.
Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf.
2.
File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf.
3.
Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf.
4.
Keyboard Slide: 75 lbf.
H.
Door Locks: REFER TO FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08710
I.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18
for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
2.
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
J.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 20 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere
as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place
anchors.
2.4
A.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality
standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture
content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
C.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
D.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
1.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
E.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
1.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be
complete.
F.
Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
2.5
A.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the
following requirements:
1.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGL.
2.
Postformed Surfaces: HGP.
3.
Vertical Surfaces: HGS.
4.
Edges: Matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
D.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay.
2.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay.
3.
Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 20 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
E.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.
F.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless
located directly under tops.
2.6
A.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate
countertops.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements
1.
As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.
D.
Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
E.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F.
Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard.
G.
Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
A.
SHOP FINISHING
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
2.7
B.
General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
1.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed
surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with
plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative overlay.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
PREPARATION
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete
work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 20 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in
Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level
and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine
finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight
line.
2.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c.
with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
F.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into
underside of countertop.
1.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully
dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
3.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. There are no
backsplashes associated with the solid-surfacing material countertops.
4.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G.
Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish
coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were
applied in shop.
3.3
A.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 20 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 07 21 00 – PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Pre-Engineered Building Insulation for New Construction.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 13 12 10 – Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings.
B.
Division 15 – Mechanical: Rough-in utilities.
C.
Division 16 – Electrical: Rough-in utilities.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B.
ASTM E 96 – Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form
(Procedure B).
C.
ASTM C 665 – Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D.
NFPA 255 – Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E.
UL 723 – Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
F.
ASTM C 1136 – Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation.
1.4
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Thermal Resistance of Installed System: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
Insulating system shall have a continuous vapor barrier inside of building purlins, girts, and insulation to
provide complete isolation from inside conditioned air.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of connections and attachments, general details, anchorages and
method of anchorage and installation.
D.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm)
square or long, representing actual products required for this project.
E.
Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing product systems specified in this
section with minimum five years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section.
C.
Insulation system components to include a ten-year limited material warranty.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store products indoors and protect from moisture, construction traffic, and damage.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended
by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer’s absolute limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Thermal Design, Inc., Simple Saver System, P. O. Box 468, 601 N. Main
Street, Madison, NE 68748. ASD. Tel: (800) 255-0776 or (402) 454-6591. Fax: (402) 454-2708.
Email: sales@thermaldesign.com. www.thermaldesigns.com.
B.
Substitutions: As approved by architect.
C.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Simple Saver System consists of Batt Insulation, Roof Insulation, Wall Insulation, Vapor Barrier Liner
Fabric, Thermal Breaks, Straps, and other devices and components in a proprietary insulation system as
follows:
1.
Batt Insulation: ASTM C 991 Type 1; preformed formaldehyde-free glass fiber batt conforming
to the following:
a.
Batt Size: Equal to purlin/girt spacing by manufacturer’s standard lengths.
2.
Roof Insulation: Formaldehyde-free fiberglass batt or fiberglass blanket complying with ASTM C
991 Type 1 and ASTM E 84 with a thermal resistance and thickness as follows:
a.
As indicated on the drawings.
3.
Wall Insulation: Formaldehyde-free fiberglass blanket or batt complying with ASTM C 991 Type
1, ASTM E 136 and ASTM E 84 with a thermal resistance and thickness as follows:
a.
As indicated on the drawings.
4.
Vapor Barrier Liner Fabric: Syseal® type woven, reinforced, high-density polyethylene yarns
coated on both sides with a continuous white or colored polyethylene coatings, as follows:
a.
Product complies with ASTM C 1136, Types 1 through Type VI.
b.
Perm rating: 0.02 for fabric and for seams in accordance with ASTM E 96.
c.
Flame/Smoke Properties:
1)
25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2)
Self-extinguishes with field test using matches and butane lighter.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
d.
e.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Ultraviolet radiation inhibitor to minimum UVMAX® rating of 8.
Size and seaming: Manufactured in large custom pieces by extrusion welding from roll
goods, and fabricated to substantially fit defined building area with minimum practicable
job site sealing.
f.
Provide with factory triple, extrusion welded seams. Stapled seams or heat-melted seams
are not acceptable due to degradation of fabric.
g.
Factory-folded to allow for rapid installation.
h.
Color:
1)
White.
Vapor Barrier Lap Sealant: Solvent-based, Simple Saver polyethylene fabric adhesive.
Vapor Barrier Tape: Double-sided sealant tape ¾ inch (19 mm) wide by 1/32 inch (.79 mm) thick.
Vapor Barrier Patch Tape: Single-sided, adhesive backed sealant tape 3 inches (76 mm) wide
made from same material as Syseal® type liner fabric.
Thermal Breaks:
a.
3/16 inch (4.7 mm) thick by 3 inch (76 mm) wide white, closed-cell polyethylene foam
with pre-applied adhesive film and peel-off backing.
b.
Polystyrene Snap-R snap-on thermal blocks.
Straps:
a.
100 KSI minimum yield tempered, high-tensile-strength steel.
b.
Size: Not less than 0.020 inch (0.50 mm) thick by 1 inch (25 mm) by continuous length.
c.
Galvanized, primed, and painted to match specified finish color on the exposed side.
d.
Color:
1)
White.
Fasteners:
a.
For light gage steel: #12 by ¾ (19 mm) inch plated Tek 2 type screws with sealing washer,
painted to match specified color.
b.
For heavy gage steel: #12 by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) plated Tek 4 type screws with sealing
washer, painted to match specified color.
Wall Insulation Hangers: Fast-R preformed rigid hangers, 32 inch (813 mm) long galvanized steel
strips with barbed arrows every 8 inches (203 mm) along its length.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that building structure including all bracing and any concealed building systems are completed and
approved prior to installing liner system and insulation in the structure.
B.
Correct any unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
C.
If conditions are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation
before proceeding.
3.2
INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.
Install pre-engineered building insulation system in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions and the approved shop drawings.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Install in exterior spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
D.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
E.
Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of the sealed liner fabric and around mechanical
and electrical services within plane of insulation.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.3
ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.4
Straps:
1.
Cut straps to length and install in the pattern and spacings indicated on shop drawings.
2.
Tension straps to required value.
Vapor Barrier Fabric:
1.
Install vapor barrier fabric in large one-piece custom fabricated pieces to substantially fit defined
building areas with minimum practicable job site sealing.
2.
Position pre-folded fabric on the strap platform along one eave purlin.
3.
Clamp the two bottom corners at the eave and also centered on the bay.
4.
Pull the other end of the pleat-folded fabric across the building width on the strap platform,
pausing only at the ridge to fasten the straps and fabric in position where plane of roof changes
and to release temporary fasteners on the opposite ridge purlins.
5.
Once positioned, install fasteners from the bottom side at each strap/purlins intersection.
6.
Trim edges and seal along the rafters.
7.
All seams must be completely sealed and stapled seams not acceptable.
Insulation:
1.
Unpack and shake to a thickness exceeding the specified thickness.
2.
Ensure the cavities are filled completely with insulation.
3.
Place on the vapor barrier liner fabric without voids or gaps.
4.
Place top layer of insulation over and perpendicular to the purlins without voids or gaps, as roof
sheathing is applied.
5.
Place thermal block on top of purlins or bottom of purlins for retrofit work, if no other thermal
break exists.
6.
Place new insulation between purlins at the required thickness for the R-value specified.
Seal vapor barrier fabric to the wall fabric and elsewhere as required to provide a continuous vapor
barrier.
WALL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation:
1.
Install thermal break to exterior surface of girts as wall sheathing is applied.
2.
(Optional) Install self-sticking foam thermal break to interior surface of girts prior to installation
of insulation.
3.
Position and secure Fast-R hangers to girts on the inside face of the wall sheathing.
4.
Cut insulation to required lengths to fit vertically between girts.
5.
Fluff the insulation to the full-specified thickness.
6.
Neatly position in place and secure to Fast-R hangers.
7.
Ensure that cavities are filled completely with insulation.
B.
Vapor Barrier Fabric:
1.
Install vapor barrier fabric in large one-piece custom fabricated pieces to substantially fit defined
areas with minimum practicable job site sealing.
2.
Apply the vapor barrier fabric by clamping it in position over eave strap and installing fasteners
through the eave strap into each roof strap, permanently clamping the wall fabric between them.
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.
4.
C.
3.5
Once in position, draw the vapor barrier fabric down over the column flanges to the base angle and
install vertical straps along each column and 5 feet 0 inches on center, maximum, fastening to each
girt to retain system permanently in place.
All seams must be completely sealed and stapled seams not acceptable.
Seal wall fabric to the roof fabric, to the base angle and up the columns to provide a continuous vapor
barrier.
CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt or exposed sealant from the exposed vapor barrier fabric.
B.
Remove scraps and debris from the site.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect system products until completion of installation.
B.
Repair or replace damaged products before completion of insulation system installation.
3.7
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to building sections.
END OF SECTION
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING INSULATION
07 21 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Silicone joint sealants.
Urethane joint sealants.
Latex joint sealants.
Acoustical joint sealants.
Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
Section 093000 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.
Section 095123 "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical
sealant.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer
agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or
construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written
specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by jointsealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
Comply with VOC limits shown in Section 018113.13 “Sustainable Design Requirements – LEED for
New Construction and Major Renovations.”
C.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,
grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be
continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates,
provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous
joint substrates indicated for Project.
E.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated
contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
F.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.3
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290.
Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
Pecora Corporation; 898.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for
Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.4
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.5
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.
May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying
with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.6
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O
(open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as
approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density
to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to
joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum
bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.3
Concrete.
Masonry.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Exterior insulation and finish systems.
Metal.
Glass.
Porcelain enamel.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated
by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with jointsealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in
ASTM C 1193.
a.
G.
3.4
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction
at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that
fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed
applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
PROTECTION
A.
3.7
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50.
Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 100/50.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
2.
C.
Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
D.
Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
Joints between metal panels.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Tile control and expansion joints.
Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.
Joint Sealant: Latex.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 7
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
Joint Sealant Location:
a.
b.
2.
3.
E.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Acoustical joints where indicated.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 8
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 08 11 00 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A.
Furnish and install hollow metal doors and door and fixed window frames as shown on the
drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.
B.
Section 07920 – Joint Sealants.
C.
Section 08140 – Flush Wood Doors.
D.
Section 08710 – Finish Hardware.
E.
Section 09260 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
F.
Section 09900 – Painting.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Provide labels on doors where rating is required.
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A.
As specified provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B.
Shop Drawings shall describe and locate all items being furnished and shall include large scale
details of principal construction features. Identify doors and frames with reference numbers
shown and scheduled on drawings.
C.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Product Data and Documentation as required to meet requirements of Section 018113.13
“Sustainable Design Requirements – LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations.”
1.05
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A.
As specified in Section 01600 Product Requirements.
B.
Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding, spreaders, and
paper wrappings to protect hollow metal items.
C.
Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least 1 inch or more off the ground or floor and at
least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.
D.
Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer.
E.
Protect exposed finish surfaces of prefinished items with masking tape.
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS:
A.
Materials. Commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM Designation A36666T and free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. Face sheets not less than 18 gauge at
Interior and 16 gauge at Exterior.
B.
Design Construction.
1.
Fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical
edges.
2.
Make corner bends true and straight and of minimum radius for the gauge of metal used.
3.
Stiffen face sheets with continuous vertical formed steel section occupying the full
thickness of the interior space between door faces. Stiffeners shall be not less than 22
gauge, spaced not more than 6" apart and securely attached to both face sheets by spot
welds not more than 4" on center. Grind, fill, and dress smooth all welds to make them
invisible and provide a smooth, flush finish.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 00 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
a.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.02
Option: Doors may be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with
impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and
laminated to both inside faces of the panels in lieu of metal stiffeners and batt
insulation.
4.
Join door faces at their vertical edges by a continuous weld extending to the full height of
the door. Grind, fill and dress smooth all welds to make them invisible and provide a
smooth flush surface.
5.
Close top and bottom edges of all doors with a continuous recessed steel channel not less
than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and spot welded to both faces.
6.
Provide edge profiles on both vertical edges of doors as follows: Single-acting swing
doors - beveled 1/8" in 2.
7.
Hardware reinforcements.
a.
Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully
templated hardware only, in accord with the templates provided by the hardware
contractor. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have
reinforcing plates only. All drilling and tapping shall be done by others.
Provide bridge reinforcing for door closer installed with thru bolts.
b.
Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
1.
Hinges and pivot reinforcement: 7 gauge
2.
Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders,concealed
or surface-mounted closers: 12 gauge
3.
Reinforcements for all other surface-mounted hardware: 16 gauge
Hardware Locations:
1.
Locate hardware on doors and frames as follows:
a.
Hinges: Top 5" from head of frame to top of hinge
Bottom: 10" from finished floor to bottom of hinge
Intermediate:
centered between top and bottom hinges
b.
Unit and integral type
locks and latches 38" to center of knob (from finished floor)
c.
Panic hardware 40" to centerline of cross bar (from finished floor) or height
recommended by the manufacturer
Clearances:
1.
Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:
a.
Between doors and frame,
At head and jambs
1/8"
b.
At door sills:
where no threshold is used
3/8" max.
where threshold is used
1/4" max.
between door and threshold
Glass Moldings and Stops:
1.
Where shown on schedule, provide doors with flush-mounted metal trim to secure
glazing in accordance with glass sizes shown.
2.
Weld fixed moldings to the door on the security side.
3.
Loose stops shall not be less than 20 gauge steel, with mitered corner joints, secured to
the framed opening by cadmium - or zinc-coated countersunk screws. Use no snap-on
attachments.
Hollow metal panels shall be constructed similar to doors. Provide 12 gauge bridge reinforcing as
required for connections.
HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES:
A.
Materials:
1.
Make door and window frames for exterior openings of commercial grade cold rolled
steel conforming to ASTM Designation A366-66T, not less than 14 gauge.
2.
Make door and window frames for interior openings and interior glazed, partitions of
either commercial grade cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM Designation A366-66T
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 00 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
B.
2.03
or commercial grade hot rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM Designation
A569-66T. Metal thickness for frames shall be not less than 16 gauge. Bottom and top
channels to be 14 gauge.
Design and Construction:
1.
Make all frames welded units with integral trim. Use no knocked down frames.
2.
Make corner joints with contact edges closed tight, mitered and continuously welded and
stops mitered or butted. Use no gussets.
3.
Minimum depth of stops 5/8".
4.
Hardware reinforcements:
a.
Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames at the factory for fully templated
mortised hardware only, in accord with approved hardware schedule and
templates provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted
hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling
and tapping shall be done by others.
b.
Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
1.
Hinge and pivot reinforcements - 7 gauge, 1 1/4" x 10" min. size.
2.
Strike reinforcements - 12 gauge
3.
Flush bolt reinforcements - 12 gauge
4.
Closer reinforcements - 12 gauge
5.
Reinforcements for surface-mounted hardware - 12 gauge
5.
Floor Anchors:
a.
Weld floor anchors inside each jamb, with two holes provided at each jamb for
floor anchorage.
b.
Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors, with not less than 2" height
adjustment.
c.
Minimum thickness of floor anchors 4 gauge.
6.
Jamb Anchors:
a.
Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb
anchors of the T-strap or stirrup-and-strap type. Anchors 2" x 10" in size,
corrugated and/or perforated. The number of anchors provided on each jamb
shall be as follows:
1.
Frames up to 7'6" height - 3 anchors.
2.
Frames 7'6" to 8'0" height - 4 anchors.
3.
Frames over 8'0" height - 1 anchor for each 2' or fraction.
b.
Frames for installation in stud partitions shall be provided with steel anchors of
suitable design, not less than 18 gauge thickness, securely welded inside each
jamb as follows:
1.
Frames up to 7'6" height - 4 anchors
2.
Frames 7'6" to 8'0" height - 5 anchors
3.
Frames over 8'0" height - 5 anchors plus one additional
7.
Frames over 4'0" wide for installation in masonry walls shall have an angle or channel
stiffener, not less than 12 gauge and not longer than the opening width, welded into the
head at the factory. Such stiffeners shall not be used as lintels or load-carrying members.
8.
Provide all frames with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the feet of both jambs to
serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
9.
Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 20 gauge thickness, butted
at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc plated
screws.
10.
Provide all fillers between window mullions and glass frame and partitions.
11.
Provide plaster guards at hinges and strikes on fully grouted frames
LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES:
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 00 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
B.
2.04
PART 3
Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection ratings as
determined and scheduled by the Architect. Such doors and frames shall be constructed as tested
and approved by Underwriters Laboratories or Warnock Hersey.
If any Door or Frame specified by the Architect to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate
labeling because of its design, hardware or for any other reason, notify the Architect before
starting fabrication of that item.
FINISH:
A.
Finish. After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed, filled and
sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges smooth, level and free of all irregularities.
Doors shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated, on
all exposed surfaces, with a rust-inhibitive primer which is fully cured before shipment.
EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION OF FRAMES:
A.
Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level and maintain
jambs plumb and square.
B.
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
C.
Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and
plumb, and anchors are securely attached.
D.
Allow for expansion movement as required.
E.
All door frames to be grouted solid.
F.
All window frames to be spot grouted at anchors.
3.02
INSTALLATION OF DOORS:
A.
Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions.
B.
Adjust operable parts for correct function.
C.
Remove hardware, with the exception of prime-coated items, tag, box, and reinstall after finish
paint work is completed.
3.03
PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP:
A.
Immediately after erection, areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be sanded smooth and
touched up with same primer as applied at shop.
B.
Remove rust before above specified touch-up is applied.
C.
Touch-up shall not be obvious.
3.04
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK:
A.
Protect installed hollow metal work against damage from other construction work.
END OF SECTION
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 00 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 08 33 00- OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing and framed opening.
B.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Product Requirements for cylinder core and keys.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting: Field applied finish.
D.
Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes: Conduit from electric circuit to door operator and from
door operator to control station.
E.
Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Power to disconnect.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B.
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
Flat Bar.
C.
ASTM A 924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
D.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
E.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
F.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Overhead coiling insulated doors:
1.
Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf (958 Pa)
without damage to door or assembly components.
2.
Operation: Design door assembly, including operator, to operate for not less than
20,000 cycles.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one
manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to
manufacturer of primary components.
C.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Details of construction and fabrication.
4.
Installation instructions.
OVERHEAD COILDING DOORS
08 33 00-1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.5
C.
Shop Drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring
methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent
construction.
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches
(150 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit lubrication requirements and frequency, and
periodic adjustments required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a
minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of
this section with minimum three years and approved by manufacturer.
C.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship.
1.
Finish areas designated by Architect.
2.
Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved
by Architect.
3.
Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete
and dry.
C.
Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage
to installed materials.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door and operators System warranty for 10 year against
delamination of polyurethane foam from steel face and all other components for 3 years or
20,000 cycles, whichever comes first.
B.
Warranty: Manufacturer’s limited door warranty for 2 years for all parts and components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
OVERHEAD COILDING DOORS
08 33 00-2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.2
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corporation, which is located at: 2501 S. State
Highway 121 Bus. Suite 200 ; Lewisville, TX 75067; Toll Free Tel: 800-929-3667; Tel:
469-549-7100; Fax: 972-906-1499; Email: request info (arcat@overheaddoor.com); Web:
www.overheaddoor.com
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
INSULATED OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE DOORS
A.
Overhead Coiling Stormtite Insulated Service Doors: Overhead Door Corporation 625 Series.
1.
Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be
attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement.
a.
Flat profile type F-265i for doors up to 40 feet (12.19 m) wide.
b.
Front slat fabricated of:
1)
24 gauge galvanized steel.
c.
Back slat fabricated of:
1)
24 gauge galvanized steel.
d.
Slat cavity filled with CFC-free foamed-in-place, polyurethane insulation.
1)
R-Value: 7.7, U-Value: 0.13.
2)
Sound Rating: STC-21.
2.
Finish:
a.
Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653
and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick
baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester top coat.
1)
Polyester Top Coat.
a)
Tan polyester.
2)
Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of
rust-inhibitive primer.
3.
Weatherseals:
a.
Vinyl bottom seal, exterior guide and internal hood seals.
b.
Interior guide weatherseal.
c.
Lintel weatherseal.
4.
Bottom Bar:
a.
Two galvanized steel angles minimum thickness 1/8 inch (3 mm) bolted back to
back to reinforce curtain in the guides.
5.
Guides: Three Structural steel angles.
a.
Finish: PowderGuard Zinc Finish for guides, bottom bar and head plate.
6.
Brackets:
a.
Galvanized steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood.
7.
Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel,
supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03 inch per foot of span.
Counterbalance is adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel.
8.
Hood: Provide with internal hood baffle weatherseal.
a.
24 gauge galvanized steel with intermediate supports as required.
9.
Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by
manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1
foot per second.
a.
Operator Controls:
1)
Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons.
2)
Controls for interior location.
3)
Controls flush mounted.
b.
Motor Voltage: 115/230 single phase, 60 Hz.
10.
Windload Design:
a.
Standard windload shall be 20 PSF.
11.
Wall Mounting Condition:
a.
Face-of-wall mounting.
OVERHEAD COILDING DOORS
08 33 00-3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
B.
Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to
be performed.
C.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07900.
F.
Install perimeter trim and closures.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding
or distortion.
B.
Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
C.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
END OF SECTION
OVERHEAD COILDING DOORS
08 33 00-4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 08 71 00
FINISH HARDWARE DOORS AND WINDOWS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Related Documents
A. Drawings General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions (if any) and
Division 1 – General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08110 – Steel Doors and Frames
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufactures Qualifications
1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Fire door Hardware
a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be
in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label.
b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type
required by NFPA.
1.5
REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI A156.1
Butts and Hinges
2. ANSI A156.2
Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.
3. ANSI A156.3
Exit Devices.
4. ANSI A156.4
Door Controls – Closers
5. ANSI A156.5
Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products.
6. ANSI A156.6
Architectural Door Trim.
7. ANSI A156.7
Template Hinge Dimensions
8. ANSI A156.8
Door Controls – Overhead Holders.
9. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware.
10. ANSI A156.17
Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots.
11. ANSI A156.18
Materials and Finishes.
12. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds.
B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA)
1. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches.
2. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers.
3. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices.
C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
1. 36CFR Part 1191 – Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
FINISH HARDWARE DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 71 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
1. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
2. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature.
3. DHI-04 Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Door and Frames.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
F. Steel Door Institute
1. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application).
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Provide product data on specified hardware.
2. Submit manufacturer’s parts lists, templates, and installation instructions.
3. Submit operation and maintenance data including data on operating hardware, lubrication
requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
B. Hardware Schedule
1. Include for each item: quantities: manufacturer’s name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail
information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set
identification cross-referenced to drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock and trim material
evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI or BHMA standard type number or function number
from manufacturer’s catalog if not covered by ANSI or BHMA; and list of abbreviations.
2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors.
C. Keying Schedule
1. Develop in accordance with DHI-03.
2. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project.
D. Certificates of Compliance
1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, that
proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated,
scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts,
self-closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80. Identify all
such doors on certificates.
E. Maintenance Instructions
1. Furnish 2 complete copies of maintenance instruction listing routine maintenance procedures,
possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacture’s standard commercial carton or
container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule.
C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended.
1.8
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between
hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required,
size of holes, and similar details.
FINISH HARDWARE DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 71 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.9
WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty for door closers.
B. Provide two year warranty for all hardware items except door closers.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hinges
1. Mckinney.
2. Lawrence.
B. Lock and latches
1. Yale Security.
2. Sargent.
C. Push/Pulls
1. Rockwood (Standoffs on custom push mounted 2” and 8” From top and bottom
D. Exit Devices
1. Sargent, Inc.
2. Von Duprin, Inc.
E. Closers
1. LCN.
2. Sargent
F. Gasketing/Thresholds
1. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
2. Rees Enterprises, Inc.
G. Protection Plates
1. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
2. Rockwood
H. Door Stops/Bumpers
1. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
3. Rockwood.
I. Door Silencers
1. Triangle Brass manufacturing Co.
2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
3. Rockwood.
J. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 for items not indicated as “No Substitutions”
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Closers
1. General
a. Surface type closers: Size 1 or 2 through size 6.
b. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size oe size larger than manufacturer’s published
recommendations, but not less than size 5.
c. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer’s published recommendations,
except as specified otherwise.
d. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for
outswinging exterior doors.
FINISH HARDWARE DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 71 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
e.
f.
Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90degree open position.
Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5
pounds applied at knob or handle for interior doors; for exterior doors, set to minimum
required to relatch door.
B. Accessories
1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys,
required to adjust hardware items.
C. Fastenings
1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware.
2. Concrete or masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields.
3. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze or stainless steel.
4. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface
hinges.
D. Fire Door Hardware
1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80.
E. Keys: Nickel silver
2.3
KEYING
A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in
writing.
B. Key locks as directed by Owner. Supplier to consult with Owner and/or Owners Representatives and
Architect prior to ordering locks to establish required level of keying.
C. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means.
D. Supplier to provide training of Owners personnel (maintenance department, principal(s) teacher(s) and
other authorized personnel) on the operation and troubleshooting of the access control locks.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware
for Custom Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Install in accordance with DHI-02.
3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted.
4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts
such as sex bolts and nuts.
5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped.
B. Door-Closing Device
FINISH HARDWARE DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 71 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer.
Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and
corridors.
Kick Plates
1. Install kick plates on push side of single-acting doors.
Thresholds
1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields.
2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping.
3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions.
Weatherseals
1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after
door and frames have been finish painted.
2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position.
3. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer.
Gasketing
1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame.
Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors
1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105.
END OF SECTION
FINISH HARDWARE DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 71 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 08 80 00- GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
Windows.
2.
Doors.
3.
Glazed entrances.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 8 Section "Metal Doors and Frames."
DEFINITIONS
Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing
publications.
B.
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking,
and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
C.
Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation,
delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by
referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.4
A.
B.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass
thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size
openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat
treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according
to the following requirements:
a.
Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated.
b.
Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not
more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1)
Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
C.
Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and
glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
D.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based
on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:
1.
For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2.
For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3.
Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298
WINDOW 4.1 computer program.
4.
Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.5
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass.
1.
Each type of glass with colored interlayer.
2.
For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated.
C.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a
schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:
1.
Tinted float glass.
2.
Glazing sealants.
G.
SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric glazing sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
H.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Tinted Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing float glass from
one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated.
D.
Source Limitations for Laminated Glass: Obtain laminated-glass units from one manufacturer using the
same type of glass lites and interlayers for each type of unit indicated.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
E.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
product and installation method indicated.
F.
Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited according to the
NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
G.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a
36-month period.
1.
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2.
Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3.
Test elastomeric glazing sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance
with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
H.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing
accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants.
1.
Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
a.
Perform tests under normal environmental conditions replicating those that will exist
during installation.
2.
Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and each
type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic and laminated) as well as one sample of
each glazing accessory (gaskets, tape sealants, setting blocks, and spacers).
3.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4.
For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
5.
Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on
previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing
materials matching those submitted.
I.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
J.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."
2.
SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA TB-3001,
"Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
1.7
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent
damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel
substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
WARRANTY
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Tinted-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and
signed by tinted-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those tinted-glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within
specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed
by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for laminated-glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within
specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
A.
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated
in schedules at the end of Part 3.
A.
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom
edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
2.3
B.
2.4
A.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select);
class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.
INSULATING-GLASS UNITS
Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E774 for Class CBA units and with requirements
specified in this Article and in Part 2 “Insulating-Glass Units” Article.
1.
2.
GLAZING
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist
thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass
design requirements specified in Part 1 “Performance Requirements” Article.
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.
08 80 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.
4.
5.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Light: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass
units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer
surfaces of glass lites at unit’s edge.
Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
a.
Polyisobutylene and silicone; or
b.
Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl.
Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer’s standard spacer material and construction complying with
the following requirements:
a.
Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
b.
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
CERAMIC-COATED SPANDREL GLASS
Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic
coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified.
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1.
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
3.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
this characteristic.
GLAZING TAPES
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of
100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on
rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products
indicated below:
1.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.9
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A.
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
B.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners.
2.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
3.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A.
PREPARATION
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.2
3.3
A.
GLAZING, GENERAL
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge
and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by
Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project
site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other
imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable
for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are
used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with
system performance requirements.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With
glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced
glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
A.
TAPE GLAZING
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or
protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
3.4
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make
them fit opening.
C.
Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to
jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to
heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints
in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
A.
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and
glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel
and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in
position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant
to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6
A.
B.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and
clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 7
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
3.7
A.
GLASS SCHEDULE
See Drawings for Glazing Schedule.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 8
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior
non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-loadbearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated,
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an
independent testing agency.
2.2
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise
indicated.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 guages.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1.
E.
3.
2.3
Configuration: hat shaped.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels:
flanges.
1.
2.
I.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.
1.
H.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
G.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2inch wide flanges.
1.
2.
F.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness
not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with
continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel
thickness of 0.033 inch.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of
7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness
indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter wire, or double
strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.
B.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
C.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch.
D.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and
minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.
1.
E.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches.
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges,
3/4 inch deep.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
F.
Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in
anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead
structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been
installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their
full strength.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of
time needed for coordination and construction.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also
framing installation.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies:
to framing installation.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies:
to framing installation.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also
framing installation.
comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to
Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply
Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply
comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab
bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required
by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,
install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce
joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance
from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door
openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing
required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid
structure.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
E.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
F.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.5
Screw to wood framing.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
Erect insulation specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" vertically and hold in place with
Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced
24 inches o.c.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of
attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner
and cut insulation to fit.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch
from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings
required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent
devices.
a.
3.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and
hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend
through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet
vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to
fit into wall track.
G.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured
lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will
receive finishes.
END OF SECTION
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Interior gypsum board.
Tile backing panels.
Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension
systems that support gypsum board panels.
Section 093000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.4
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on
risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an
independent testing agency.
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from
materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of
Project site.
C.
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that
correspond with support system indicated.
2.3
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Abuse-Resistant and Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. Basis of
Design: American Gypsum M Bloc IR Type X or approved equal.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
D.
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland.
USG Corporation.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TILE BACKING PANELS
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
2.5
C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard.
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker.
National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
a.
b.
2.6
Cornerbead.
Expansion (control) joint.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other
compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use
setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
2.7
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General:
Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
2.
D.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to
0.112 inch thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 25 percent.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying
with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with VOC limits shown in Section 018113.13 “Sustainable
Design Requirements – LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting
end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one
framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or
gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges
or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control
joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.),
except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and
decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide
joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges
of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of
partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed
after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: All wet areas, including Kitchen, Rest Rooms, Shower
Rooms and Janitors Closets.
Single-Layer Application:
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
b.
3.
4.
3.4
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.
Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.
B.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform
plane across panel surfaces.
3.5
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for
panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
3.6
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended
to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a.
E.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other nondrywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and
other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 7
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 09 51 23 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.2
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed
by a qualified testing agency.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.5
1.6
Acoustical tiles for ceilings.
Concealed suspension systems.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of
quantity installed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected
against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.
C.
Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
FIELD CONDITIONS
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09 51 23 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for
its intended use.
1.
Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning
acoustical tile ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from
single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply
with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
1.
2.3
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test
specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern
designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide
products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements
indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
ACOUSTICAL TILES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Refer to Finish Legends in Drawings.
2.
Do not assume that every combination of fire-resistance rating, classification, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical rating, edge detail, thickness, and size listed under each product description
is available. Before retaining salient characteristics, verify availability with manufacturers.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09 51 23 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
2.4
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements. Products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in Finish Legend on Drawing AF-601.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types,
structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in
ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for
attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
a.
b.
C.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition.
Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchors.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch
diameter wire.
D.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
E.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch thick, galvanizedsteel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and
5/16-inch diameter bolts.
F.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces.
G.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical tiles inplace.
2.5
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements. Products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in Finish Legend on Drawing AF-601.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09 51 23 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical
tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and
other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or
mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite
edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown
on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where requiredto miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of
three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other
devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail
due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members,
by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the
structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to
cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated
fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install
carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from
ends of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards and publications.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09 51 23 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns.
Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to
permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-inplace or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.
1.
2.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3
inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place
splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of
material.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
Install tiles with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.
Install tiles in a basket-weave pattern.
Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and
around penetrations through tile.
Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and
moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistancerated assembly.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and
replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
09 51 23 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 09 90 00- PAINTING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED:
A.
Painting shall include and not be limited to emulsions, enamels, paints, varnishes and sealers.
B.
It is the intent of these specifications to secure a completely furnished paint job in accordance
with the best usual practices.
C.
All surfaces exposed in the finished work, except surfaces and areas specified not to be painted
and equipment having a facotry applied finish shall be painted with an appropriate finish even
though not specifically mentioned herein.
D.
Gray prime coated material, whether backed or not, is not to be construed as a finish coat.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A.
Section 05210 – Steel Joists
B.
Section 05300 – Metal Decking
C.
Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications
D.
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry
E.
Section 07600 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
F.
Section 08100 – Metal Doors and Frames
G.
Section 09250 – Gypsum Wallboard
H.
Division 15 – Mechanical
I.
Division 16 – Electrical
1.03
EXTENT OF WORK:
A.
Except as otherwise noted or specified, paint all surfaces exposed-to-view, including piping,
equipment and similar items. Finish spaces shall be considered as exposed-to-view.
B.
Paint Schedules: Unless otherwise specified, all Paint Schedules shall be two (2) coat systems,
consisting of one (1) sealer or prime coat, and one (1) finish coat, and all finishes shall be in
compliance with the Paint Schedules listed in this specification.
C.
Repainting of Existing or Repaired Substrates: Where damaged, touchup of the prime/sealer coat
shall satisfy the first coat requirement of the paint schedules. Apply finish coat as specified.
D.
Closed Openings/Patching Walls: Substrate materials used to close and patch shall receive texture
as required to match surrounding areas, or as specified, shall be prime coated, and shall receive
two finish coats of paint. Finish coats shall be carried to corners at both sides of patched areas;
from floor below, and to ceiling above patched areas.
E.
Excluded items: The following items and surfaces are specifically excluded from painting
requirements:
1.
Materials with factory-applied finish coats, except for matching touch-up requirements.
2.
Materials which have integral color finish, such as aluminum, glass, floor coverings,
acoustical tile, integral-colored stucco and plaster.
3.
New portland cement plaster
4.
Aluminum with anodized or baked-on finish, and stainless steel.
5.
Finish hardware, except hardware with USP finish.
6.
Flooring.
7.
Electrical fixtures and plates, in general (refer to Electrical Division).
8.
Plastic laminate.
9.
All items with complete factory or shop finish, except as otherwise specified.
10.
Code required labels, equipment identification, performance rating, name or
nomenclature plates, etc.
11.
Factory finished architectural woodwork, casework and doors.
12.
Other surfaces as shown on Drawings.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
PAINTING
09 90 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
B.
C.
D.
Only the products shown in the paint schedules, or equals, so determined and approved by the
submittal process, shall be used for the work.
Single Source Responsibility: To the greatest extent possible, provide all materials by a single
manufacturer. Provide top-of-the-line primers and other undercoat paint by same manufacturer as
finish coat.
Container Identification: Each container shall be labeled as follows:
1.
Manufacturer's Name.
2.
Type of Paint
3.
Manufacturer's Stock Number.
4.
Color.
5.
Instructions for Reducing, Where Applicable.
Field Quality Control:
1.
Request review of first finished room space, or item of each color scheme required by
Architect for color, texture, and workmanship.
2.
Use first acceptable room, space or item as project standard for each color scheme.
3.
For spray application, paint surface not smaller than 100 square feet as project standard.
1.05
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Submit data on coatings selected from the painting schedules or on products of other
manufacturers proposed for use, including data on primers/sealers and complete painting
schedules for each application.
B.
Colors may be pre-selected by the Architect from a single manufacturer's color line. If materials
from another manufacturer's lines are submitted for use, they shall be the closest shades to those
specified as pre-selected herein or in other Sections.
C.
Submit, together with regularly scheduled requests for payment: Legible, dated copies of invoices,
paid or otherwise, with the project name written thereon at the time of sale, verifying the purchase
of, and the quantity of approved materials used.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A.
Deliver and store materials in the manufacturer's original containers with labels intact and seals
unbroken.
B.
Materials shall be stored in a well ventilated area set aside for the purpose. The area shall be
heated, if necessary, to prevent freezing. Keep area clean and orderly. Store rags, paving solvents,
and similar items in closed metal containers at all times.
C.
Products which are not intended for use on the project shall not be brought to the site.
1.07
JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
Environmental Requirements:
1.
Compy with manufacturer’s recommendation as to environmental conditions under
which coatings and coating system can be applied.
2.
Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.
3.
Lighting. Provide not less than 20 foot candles illumination for all surfaces to be painted
or coated.
B.
Protection:
1.
Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted
concurrently or not to be painted.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Manufacturers shall be those whose products are listed in the Paint Schedule at the end of this
Section or are products of an approved equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
PAINTING
09 90 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
3.01
EXAMINATION:
A.
The application of any paint or coating shall constitute acceptance of that surface as suitable.
Correct surface defects. In the event of incompatibility of materials, the problem shall be resolved
prior to any application.
3.02
PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES:
A.
Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions
and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition:
1.
Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with
scrapers, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed
to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply priming
coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plaster
wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. When transparent finish is required, use spar
finish for back-priming.
2.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical
cleaning.
3.
Prime Coats: Unless the prime coat or existing coats are completely removed, a prime
coat touch-up will satisfy the first coat requirement of the three coat paint schedules.
Hard glossy prime coats must be sanded to provide profile for finish coat.
4.
Galvanized Metal: Clean all surfaces of foreign matter by wiping with Lacquer Thinner,
or other cleaner manufactured for the specific purpose of conditioning galvanized metal.
5.
Masonry: Clean surface specified for painting as directed by manufacturer.
3.03
PREPARATION OF MATERIAL:
A.
Unless otherwise specified, mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Use oils, thinners and driers only as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
B.
Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
3.04
APPLICATION OF PAINT:
A.
Remove accessories, plates, hardware, lighting fixtures and similar devices, or provide masking
during painting operations, if so allowed. Finish work shall be uniform, proper color, free of runs,
sags or flooding. For high gloss enamel finishes, lightly sand each undercoat.
B.
General: Unless otherwise specified, apply paint only in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
C.
Do not apply paint in damp, rainy, windy or dusty weather. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry. Do
not paint in direct hot sun or when temperature of surface and material is below 40 degrees F.
Allow each coat to dry for the time recommended by the manufacturer before application of
succeeding coats.
D.
Interior applications may require venting to outside air.
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
Request review of first finished room by Architect for color texture and workmanship.
B.
Use first acceptable room as project standard for each successive room or space.
C.
Obtain approval of each paint coat before application of successive coats. Failure to obtain
approval between coats shall result in loss of credit for additional coats applied.
D.
At any time the Architect may obtain samples from the products in use at the work sites for
analysis and verification of product compliance with the specifications.
E.
Corrective Measures: As required by the Architect at no cost to the Owner.
3.06
CLEANUP:
PAINTING
09 90 00 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
A.
B.
C.
D.
Cleanup: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and
rags at the end of each day.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces.
Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others or by this Contractor for protection
of the work.
Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or
otherwise damage finished surfaces.
3.07
PROTECTION:
A.
Protection: Protect existing work and structures, whether to be painted or not.
B.
Use care to protect adjacent finishes from overlap of paint, paint smears or other defacement.
C.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes.
D.
At completion of work, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painting surfaces in manner
acceptable to the Architect.
3.08
PAINT SCHEDULE:
A.
Paint materials from the following manufacturers that are equal or superior to those specified are
acceptable for use on this project.
Dulux/ICI
Benjamin Moore & Co.
Glidden Paint Co.
Pittsburgh Paint Co.
Sherwin Williams
C.
Material selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of single
manufacturer.
D.
Paint shall be well ground, show easy brushing properties and be of such composition that it can
be easily broken up with a paddle to a smooth consistency. The paint shall neither settle badly or
cake in the containers. It shall be suitable for spraying when thinned with no more than 12
percent by volume. Percentages referred to herein are by weight unless specified elsewhere.
E.
The following Paint Schedule shall be used for the work. It is written around the products of a
single manufacturer, but that does not preclude the Contractor from using equal products from
another manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified, all Paint Schedules shall be three (3) coat
systems, consisting of one (1) sealer or prime coat, and two (2) finish coats. (In most instances,
only the finish coats are listed by name in the Paint Schedules.) Provide one manufacturer's finishcoat product for each schedule, and provide top-of-the-line primers or other undercoat paints
produced by the same manufacturer as finish coat(s). This schedule is intended to cover items to
be painted , but does not limit the contractor from painting all materials that normally and
resonable require paint.
PAINTING
1.
Metal (all exposed structure and ductwork): (GXE-Gloss Epoxy Enamel) Use following
for exposed ferrous metal surfaces. Interior and exterior.
a.
1st coat:
IP-714 High Build Industrial Epoxy Primer
b.
2nd coat:
501 EPOXY Polyamide Gloss Enamel
c.
Colors:
1)
As indicted in the drawings.
2.
Concrete Floor Sealer (interior and exposed concrete floors)
a.
1 st Coat: Concrete and terrazzo sealer B44V22 (reduced 50% w/ xylrnr R2K4).
b.
2 nd Coat: Sherwin Williams concrete and terrazzo Sealer B44V22.
4.
Interior Eggshell Latex (typical at interior gypsum board walls). Provide the following,
or equal:
09 90 00 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
a.
b.
c.
E.
F.
1st Coat: Dulux/ICI 1000-1200 Prep and Prime Block Filler Water-Based Primer
2nd Coat: 1402 Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall and Trim Paint
Colors:
1) As indicated in the drawings
5.
Interior Semi Gloss Enamel (typical at lockers). Provide the following or equal:
d.
1st Coat: Dulux/ICI Devran 224 High_Build Epoxy Coating 4 – 6 mils DFT.
e.
2nd Coat: Dulux/ICIDevthane 379 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel at 3.0 – 5.0
mils DFT (Spray finished only).
f.
Colors:
1) As indicted in the drawings
6.
Interior Semi Gloss Latex (typical at wet rooms). Provide the following or equal:
a.
1st Coat: Dulux/ICI 1000-1200 Prep and Prime Block Filler Water-Based Primer
b.
2nd Coat: 1406 Dulux Professional Interior Semi-Gloss Paint
c.
Colors:
1) As indicted in the drawings
7.
Gloss Alkyd (typical at Exterior/Interior metal door frames and doors, other
miscellaneous metal).
Provide one of the following for second coat:
a.
Glidden China Gloss Enamel B68.
b.
Sherwin Williams Industrial Enamel Series B54.
c.
Wellborn All Purpose Syn-Lustro Gloss Enamel.
d.
Colors:
1) As indicted in the drawings.
8.
Galvanized Metal Primer (Roof drain downspouts, scuppers)
Provide one of the following:
a.
Glidden Galvanized Metal Primer No. D8.
b.
Sherwin Williams Galvite Paint White B50 W 3.
c.
Wellborn Galv-Alum.
9.
Natural Finish Wood (touch-up as required for interior wood doors)
a.
1 coat Sealer Filler.
b.
1 coat Sherwin Williams Marvethane Polyurethane Satin Finish, clear.
10.
Asphalt Pavement Painting (Parking Spaces and lanes on asphalt pavement)
a.
White Color, Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, comply with AASHTO M 248,
Type I.
For surfaces not indicated above, submit for approval paint schedules of the products of the above
manufacturers, or other manufacturers for the various substrates as indicated on the drawings, or
described in the specifications.
Accent Colors: Provide accent wall colors as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09 90 00 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 10 10 00- VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Markerboards.
2.
Tackboards.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of visual display board and accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other
Work.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s specimen warranty for review and approval.
1.3
A.
WARRANTY
Porcelain Enamel Chalkboard Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace chalkboards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick
and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within specified warranty period, provided
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, installation, protection, and maintenance have been
followed.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years minimum from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PORCELAIN ENAMEL MARKERBOARDS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
2.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
3.
Greensteel, Inc.
4.
Lemco, Inc.
5.
Magnatag Visible Systems
6.
Marsh Chalkboard Company.
7.
Nelson Adams Company.
8.
Newline Products, Inc. (NPI)
B.
Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024-inch minimum.
C.
Face Sheet Material: Enameling grade steel. Coat exposed face and edges with three-coat process
consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with two-coat process
consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at manufacturer's standard
firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
10 10 00 – 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
D.
Face Sheet Cover Coat: Light-colored, special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use with
erasable dry markers.
E.
Core: 1/4-inch-thick, tempered hardboard.
F.
Backing Sheet: 0.015-inch-thick, aluminum sheet.
G.
Laminating Adhesive: Moisture-resistant, thermoplastic-type adhesive.
H.
Frame: Prefab narrow trim aluminum.
I.
Size: As noted on drawings.
J.
Options: Music Lines on marker board in Music Room.
K.
Color:
1.
Frame: Clear anodized aluminum.
2.
Markerboard: White.
2.2
A.
TACKBOARDS & DISPLAY RAILS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
2.
Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
3.
Greensteel, Inc.
4.
Lemco, Inc.
5.
Marsh Chalkboard Company.
6.
Nelson Adams Company.
7.
Newline Products, Inc. (NPI)
B.
Colored-Cork Tackboards: Single-layer, 1/4-inch-thick, seamless, compressed fine-grain, bulletin board
quality, natural-cork sheet; face sanded for natural finish; complying with MS MIL-C-15116, Type II.
1.
Backing: 1/4-inch-thick hardboard.
C.
Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full color range.
D.
Frame: To match markerboard frame.
E.
Size: Tackboard sizes as noted on drawings. Display Rails are to be 2” wide.
2.3
A.
B.
FABRICATION
Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum alloy. Provide straight,
single-length units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.
1.
Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim,
provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated.
Factory-assembled chalkboard and tackboard units, unless field-assembled units are required.
1.
Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with
minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board.
2.
Provide vertical joint system between abutting sections of chalkboards.
3.
Provide mullion trim at joints between chalkboards and tackboards.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
10 10 00 – 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.4
A.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Anodized Finish: Class I, clear anodic finish complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Install units in with perimeter lines level, straight, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials,
adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
Coordinate Project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join parts with a neat,
precise fit.
END OF SECTION
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
10 10 00 – 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 10 43 10- INTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Panel Signs.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1.
Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
2.
Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, and braille
layout.
C.
Samples: For each sign material indicated that involves color selection.
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code
provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PANEL SIGNS
General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes,
colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
B.
Plastic Laminate: Provide high-pressure laminate engraving stock with face and core plies as selected
from manufacturer's full range, see drawings for additional specifications.
C.
Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA
Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce
precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.
1.
Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
2.2
A.
ACCESSORIES
Mounting Methods:
1.
For Panel Signs: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to
sign material and mounting surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and
other defects in appearance.
2.
Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where
not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 43 10-1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within
swing of door.
B.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:
1.
Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous
surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 43 10-2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 10 44 00- FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Portable fire extinguishers.
2.
Fire extinguisher cabinets.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.
1.
Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers through one source from a single manufacturer.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following Basis-of-Design.
1.
Larsen’s Manufacturing Company, Architectural Series, Vertical duo door, DSA glass.
a.
Model:
1)
#2409-6R, Semi-Recessed, 2-1/2” Rolled edge.
b.
2.
Extinguisher: 2A10-B:C, MP 5 lb.
J L Industries
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
MATERIALS
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated, and as follows:
1.
Sheet: ASTM B 209.
2.
Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity listed including mounting bracket.
1.
Valves: Manufacturer’s standard.
2.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer’s standard.
3.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and
bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium
phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
1.
2A: 10-B:C, MP 10 lb.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as preferred by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions of wall or structure have been corrected.
A.
PREPARATION
Prepare surfaces for mounting bracket.
3.2
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Identification: As required by authority having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 10 51 00- METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Wardrobe lockers, including the following:
a.
Single tier – As indicated Sheet A750
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete bases.
2.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring and grounds.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of locker and bench.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1.
Show locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. Include locker-numbering sequence.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for
units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain locker units and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for locker installation.
B.
Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation.
C.
Deliver master keys, control keys, and combination control charts to Owner.
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.5
1.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
METAL LOCKERS
10 50 00 - 1
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in the Metal Locker Schedule at the end of
Part 3.
1.
Design Basis: Lyon Workspace Products 15”wide by 15” deep by 72” high. Color Lyon GY655
7G
2.
Acceptable substation: Penco Vanguard Steel Locker.
3.
No other substitutions will be accepted.
MATERIALS
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, suitable for exposed applications, and
stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, G60 coating designation; mill
phosphatized; suitable for exposed applications, and stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher-leveled
flatness.
C.
Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, commercial quality, coating Class C; mill
phosphatized; suitable for exposed applications; and stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher-leveled
flatness.
D.
Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts or lock
washers for nuts on moving parts.
2.3
A.
WARDROBE LOCKERS
Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions from steel sheet; flanged for double
thickness at back vertical corners. Comply with the following:
1.
Back-Material Sheet Thickness: 0.0359 inch.
2.
Side-Material Sheet Thickness: 0.0359 inch.
B.
Frames: Form channel frames from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet; lapped and welded at
corners. Form continuous integral door strike on vertical frame members. Provide resilient bumpers to
cushion door closing.
1.
Latch Hooks: Form from minimum 0.1046-inch- thick steel; welded or riveted to door frames.
2.
Cross Frames: Form intermediate channel cross frames between tiers from minimum 0.0598-inchthick steel sheet. Weld to vertical frame members.
C.
Doors: One-piece steel sheet, formed into channel shape at vertical edges and flanged at right angles at
top and bottom edges. Fabricate to prevent springing when opening or closing, and to swing 180 degrees.
Comply with the following:
1.
Sheet Thickness: 0.0747 inch minimum.
2.
Reinforcing and Sound-Dampening Panels: Brace or reinforce inner face of doors with
manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffener panels.
3.
Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows:
a.
Single-Tier Lockers: No fewer than three louver openings at top and bottom.
D.
Shelves: Provide hat shelf in single-tier units; fabricated from minimum 0.0239-inch- thick, formed steel
sheet; flanged on all edges.
E.
Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous hinge mounted to door and frame.
Metal Lockers
10513 - 2
F.
2.4
A.
Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard housing, formed from 0.0359-inch- thick nickelplated steel or stainless steel, with integral door pull, recessed for latch lifter and locking devices;
nonprotruding latch lifter; and automatic, prelocking, pry-resistant latch, as follows:
1.
Provide minimum three-point latching for each door more than 42 inches high; minimum twopoint latching for each door 42 inches high or less.
2.
Provide single-point gravity or spring-actuated latch with padlock lug.
LOCKER ACCESSORIES
Interior Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Hooks: Manufacturer's standard zinc-plated, ball-pointed steel. Provide one double-prong ceiling
hook, and not fewer than two single-prong wall hooks for single -tier units. Attach hooks with at
least two fasteners.
B.
Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, aluminum number plates with
numerals at least 3/8 inch high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates to each locker door,
near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets.
C.
Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard; fabricated from minimum 0.0478-inch- thick steel sheet,
minimum 2-1/2-inch face width, and finished to match lockers. Fabricate trim in lengths as long as
practicable.
D.
Filler Panels: Manufacturer's standard; fabricated from minimum 0.0478-inch- thick steel sheet in an
unequal leg angle shape, and finished to match lockers. Provide slip joint filler angle formed to receive
filler panel.
2.5
A.
FABRICATION
Unit Principle: Fabricate each locker with an individual door and frame, individual top, bottom, back,
and shelves, and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.
B.
All-Welded Construction: Preassemble lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections, with no
bolts, screws, or rivets used in assembly. Grind exposed welds flush.
C.
Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion.
Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members
together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
1.
Form locker-body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.6
A.
FINISHES, GENERAL
Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.
B.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Metal Lockers
10513 - 3
2.7
A.
B.
2.8
A.
B.
2.9
A.
STEEL SHEET FINISHES
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could
impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods.
Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's
standard baked-polymer finish consisting of a thermosetting powder topcoat. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2
mils.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over
it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified
below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's
standard baked-polymer finish consisting of a thermosetting powder topcoat. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2
mils.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to
produce uniform, directionally textured polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with
long dimension of each piece.
B.
180-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, textured finish.
C.
320-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, smooth finish.
D.
Polished and Buffed Finish: Oil-ground, 180-grit finish followed by buffing.
E.
Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B finish applied to locker body.
F.
Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish applied to locker frame.
G.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Examine concrete bases for suitable conditions where metal lockers are to be installed.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Metal Lockers
10513 - 4
A.
Install metal lockers and accessories level, plumb, rigid, and flush according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Connect groups of all-welded lockers together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face
frames.
C.
Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36
inches o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion,
using concealed fasteners.
D.
Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with
concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1.
Attach recess trim to recessed lockers with concealed clips.
E.
Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers.
F.
Anchor locker benches to floors Uniformly space pedestals not more than 72 inches apart, and securely
fasten to bench top and anchor to floor.
3.3
A.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate
properly.
B.
Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish stainless-steel and nonferrous-metal surfaces.
C.
Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint.
construction.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace locker units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance.
Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
3.4
A.
Do not permit locker use during
METAL LOCKER SCHEDULE
Metal Wardrobe Locker (Kitchen): Where metal lockers of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
1.
Products: Available products include the following:
a.
Lyon Metal Products – Double Tier Quiet Lockers
2.
Size (per opening): 18”wide x 18”deep x 72” high
3.
Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
4.
Back-Material Thickness: 0.0239 inch.
5.
Side-Material Thickness: 0.0239 inch.
6.
Door-Material Thickness: 0.0598 inch.
7.
Locker Fabrication: All welded.
8.
Locker Arrangement: Single tier.
9.
Backs: Solid.
10.
Sides: Solid.
11.
Door Style: Louvered vents.
12.
Shelves: One – 9 inches from top.
13.
Hinges: Side-mounted continuous.
14.
Handles/Latches: Recessed.
15.
Accessories:
a.
Base: No base.
b.
Sloping Tops: Required.
c.
Recess Trim: Required.
d.
End Panels: Not required.
16.
Color: Lyon Metal Products, Premier Locker Color – to be selected from Manufacturer’s full line.
Metal Lockers
10513 - 5
END OF SECTION
Metal Lockers
10513 - 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
SECTION 13 12 50 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent
components including structural framing, roof panels, wall panels, soffit panels, and accessories.
B.
See Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchor-bolt
installation.
1.2
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems
Manual."
Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Design Loads: As required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures."
B.
Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
C.
Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening
of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
D.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of metal building system component indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include location,
diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate
column reactions at each location.
Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing;
include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between
shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.
Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of
support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim,
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work;
show locations of exposed fasteners.
C.
Samples: For each type of building component and for each color and texture required.
D.
Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Name and location of Project.
Order number.
Name of manufacturer.
Name of Contractor.
Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled
steel, including edition dates of each standard.
Governing building code and year of edition.
Design loads and load combinations.
Building-use category.
AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and
components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified
Manufacturer.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements.
G.
Manufacturer certificate.
H.
Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Have surveyor who performed surveys
certify their accuracy.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to
manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA.
1.
2.
AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces
metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel,"
and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D.
Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress
Design, Plastic Design," or AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses.
E.
Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Structural Members,"
for design requirements and allowable stresses.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
F.
Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal
building systems including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other
trades.
Review structural load limitations.
Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not
store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt
plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without
field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation
walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Coordinate installation of equipment supports and roof penetrations, which are specified in Division 7
Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1.
Siliconized Polyester Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Color fading more than 15 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 2 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
2.2
Alliance Steel, Inc.
American Buildings Company.
American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
Behlen Mfg. Co.
Butler Manufacturing Company.
Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation.
Crown Metal Buildings, Inc.
Garco Building Systems.
Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc.
Mesco Metal Buildings; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
Metallic Metal Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP.
Package Industries, Inc.
Southern Structures, Inc.
Spirco Manufacturing; Division of Metal Building Products, Inc.
Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation.
Steelox Systems Inc.
United Structures of America, Inc.
VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company.
STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Refer to Sheet S101, Structural General Notes and Specifications.
MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33
through 80, with G90 coating designation.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 50 or 80; with Class AZ50 coating designation.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings:
a.
b.
c.
Acrylic-Enamel Coating: Epoxy primer and acrylic-enamel topcoat; with a dry film
thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat.
Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel
topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for
topcoat.
High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical
Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic
Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially
formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604 and with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions, except as modified below:
1)
2)
d.
2.4
Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours.
Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film
thickness of 0.5 mil.
DOOR AND FRAME MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed
applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,
or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 zinc
(galvanized) or A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of
materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
1.
2.
3.
Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel
screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing
washer.
Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel
screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer.
Fasteners for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or self-tapping
Type 304 stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under
heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.
B.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,
and other deleterious impurities.
C.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,
noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
D.
Metal Panel Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber
sealant.
VOC content
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual":
"Fabrication and Erection Tolerances."
B.
Metal Panels: Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of metal panel.
2.7
Chapter IV, Section 9,
STRUCTURAL FRAMING
A.
General:
1.
Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with
baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut,
form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by rollforming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for
erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field
connections to primary framing.
a.
B.
Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop
prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.
Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand
required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames;
rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing.
Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted
assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts.
Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding process.
Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural
tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within
allowable limits for any combination of loadings.
Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime
primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.
Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel
plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted.
Rigid Modular Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates
or structural-steel shapes. Provide interior columns fabricated from round steel pipe or tube, or
shop-welded, built-up steel plates.
Frame Configuration: Single gable.
Exterior Column Type: Tapered.
Rafter Type: Tapered.
End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-bolted
assembly to comply with the following:
1.
End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shopwelded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum
thickness of 0.0598 inch.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 6
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.
D.
End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of
0.0598 inch; or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes.
Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlins, girts, eave
struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous
structural members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metalliccoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated, to comply with the following:
1.
2.
Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, builtup steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.
a.
Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.
b.
Spacing: 5’ typical, no more than 2 purlins per run
Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet, built-up
steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to
50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch- wide flanges.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
E.
Depth: As required to comply with system performance requirements.
Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet,
built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels.
Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles or 1-inch diameter, coldformed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges.
Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles.
Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where
clips are connected to galvanized framing members.
Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from minimum
0.0598-inch- thick, structural-steel sheet.
Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- thick, coldformed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings,
and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from coldformed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet;
designed to withstand required loads.
Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Rods:
ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50; or ASTM A 529/A 529M,
Grade 50; minimum 1/2-inch- diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6
inches at each end.
Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch- diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinc-coated, 7-strand
steel; with threaded end anchors.
Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to
withstand design loads.
Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes
to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes
to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through
diaphragm action of metal panels.
Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 7
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
F.
Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted.
Provide hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.
G.
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry film
thickness of 1 mil.
a.
2.
2.8
Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.5 mil on each side.
Prime galvanized members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid pretreatment.
METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
Vertical-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and
intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by
mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and
engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels.
1.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.9
Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated from
zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel, or stainless-steel sheet.
Joint Type: Panels snapped together.
Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded as standard with manufacturer.
Panel Coverage: 16 inches.
Panel Height: 2 inches.
FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANELS
A.
Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs
and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be field assembled
by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed
fasteners in side laps.
1.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
A.
Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c.
Panel Coverage: 36 inches.
Panel Height: 1.125 inches.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 8
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
B.
Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels.
1.
Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C.
Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and a single wide recess,
centered between panel edges; with flush joint between panels; with 1-inch- wide flange for attaching
interior finish; designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent
panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factoryapplied sealant in side laps.
1.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick.
a.
b.
2.
3.
2.11
Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Panel Coverage: 12 inches.
Panel Height: 1 inch.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified.
Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard
procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural
requirements.
B.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly
including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly
including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels.
Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load
requirements.
Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closedcell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to
match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure
weathertight construction.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closedcell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to
match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure
weathertight construction.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminumzinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 9
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
E.
Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile
of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in
minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
1.
F.
Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches o.c.
Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159-inch- thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in
minimum 10-foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets.
1.
G.
Opening Trim: Minimum 0.0269-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head,
jamb, and sill of other openings.
Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 10 feet o.c.
Roof Ventilators: Gravity type, complete with hardware, flashing, closures, and fittings.
1.
Continuous or Sectional-Ridge Type: Factory-engineered and -fabricated, continuous unit;
fabricated from minimum 0.0159-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal roof panels. Fabricated in
minimum 10-foot- long sections. Provide throat size and total length indicated, complete with
side baffles, ventilator assembly, end caps, splice plates, and reinforcing diaphragms.
a.
b.
c.
H.
2.12
Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.041-inch wire, or aluminum,
1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
Dampers: Manually operated, spring-loaded, vertically rising type; with chain and worm
gear operator.
Throat Size: 12 inches.
Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following
tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B.
Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following tests and
inspections and to submit reports. Special Inspector will verify that manufacturer maintains detailed
fabrication and quality-control procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy of those
procedures to perform the Work.
1.
Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by a manufacturer registered
and approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such Work without special inspection.
a.
C.
After fabrication, submit certificate of compliance with copy to authorities having
jurisdiction certifying that Work was performed according to Contract requirements.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be tested
and inspected according to AWS D1.1.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 10
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
A.
Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector
present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances.
B.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing
are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection
drawings.
D.
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system
manufacturer's professional engineer.
E.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
F.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1.
2.
3.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly
finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
G.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing
surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary
adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual
members of structure.
H.
Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level
baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor
bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout
for not less than seven days after placement.
1.
I.
Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing
to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength bolts.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and snug-tightened or
pretensioned joints.
Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae.
Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.
Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers,
ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.
Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 11
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
1.
2.
Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag.
Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
K.
Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads
and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely
attach to structural framing.
L.
Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.2
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for
thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small
as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. Field
cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.
Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated.
Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements.
Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment.
Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
B.
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or metal panels. Install
screws in predrilled holes. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into,
lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation.
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof
panel manufacturer.
D.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants
indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
3.3
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or
restricted by shipping limitations. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
B.
Field-Assembled, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with
concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging
factory-applied sealant.
Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip,
metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 12
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
4.
5.
C.
Field-Assembled, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed
fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.4
Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal
expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.
Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge caps.
Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding
equipment, vents, and accessories.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps and on
side laps of nesting-type metal panels; on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal panels; and elsewhere
as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.
At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant
and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel
edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install
panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal
wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
3.5
When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum.
When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels
over metal wall panels at eave height.
Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal
expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all
openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and
elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.
Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal
wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS
A.
General: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover
entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with
both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 13
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
4.
5.
Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation with
both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.
Protect all exposed insulation with “chicken-wire”.
B.
Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:
1.
Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and
perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over
first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to
standoffs. Chicken-wire can also be used.
C.
Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of
secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing.
1.
3.6
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut,
nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. Chicken-wire can also be used.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
2.
B.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners,
seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that
will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection.
C.
Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with
gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end
closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
D.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold
downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60
inches o.c. in between.
1.
2.
Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
E.
Circular Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers, weather
guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Mount ventilators on flat level base. Install preformed filler
strips at base to seal ventilator to metal roof panels.
F.
Continuous Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers,
weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Join sections with splice plates and end-cap skirt
assemblies where required to achieve indicated length. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal
ventilator to metal roof panels.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 14
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
G.
Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases where they
meet metal roof panels.
H.
Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as
recommended by manufacturer.
I.
Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion.
J.
Windows: Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware
and moving parts.
K.
Roof Ventilators: After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust
units to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion as needed to provide fully functioning units.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following
tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B.
Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.8
High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be inspected during installation
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested
and inspected according to AWS D1.1.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
C.
Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust
spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories.
1.
2.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning."
Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 12 50 – 15
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Spearman ISD 2014 Improvements
Spearman, Texas
Section
15000
15060
15075
15080
15310
15325
15410
15430
15440
15450
15535
15775
15781
15810
15820
15830
15850
15950
Title
Pages
General Provisions for Mechanical ..................................................................................10
Hangers and Supports ......................................................................................................8
Mechanical Identification ...................................................................................................4
Mechanical Insulation ........................................................................................................8
Fire Protection Piping ........................................................................................................4
Sprinkler Systems..............................................................................................................4
Plumbing Piping.................................................................................................................9
Plumbing Specialties .........................................................................................................5
Plumbing Fixtures ..............................................................................................................7
Plumbing Equipment .........................................................................................................6
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties ....................................................................................2
Ductless Split Systems ......................................................................................................4
Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units .......................................................................6
Ducts .................................................................................................................................5
Duct Accessories ...............................................................................................................3
Fans...................................................................................................................................5
Air Outlets and Inlets .........................................................................................................3
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing .....................................................................................7
Prepared by:
Brown Consulting Engineers, Inc.
3505 Olsen, Suite 110
Amarillo, Texas 79109
(806) 354-0141
Texas Registered Engineering Firm F-683
September 2, 2014
Specifications © 2014 Brown Consulting Engineers, Inc.
These specifications are a part of the design documentation for this particular project and are not to be used or reproduced, in whole or in
part, for any other purpose.
SECTION 15000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SPECIAL NOTE:
A.
1.2
CHECKING DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.3
1.4
The Architectural, Structural, and Electrical Plans and Specifications, including
the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent
documents issued by the Engineer, are a part of these specifications and the
accompanying mechanical plans. All the above is included herewith, will be
issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, for examination by all
bidders. Omission of drawings will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or
be used as a basis for additional compensation.
The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Check all
drawings and specifications thoroughly and notify the Engineer of any
discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect or
Engineer will provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or
specifications.
LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES:
A.
Performance all work in accordance with the codes listed below as well as the
codes of any other legal body having jurisdiction, as interpreted by the inspecting
authority.
1.
International Building Code (IBC)
2.
International Mechanical Code (IMC)
3.
International Plumbing Code (IPC)
4.
International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)
5.
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)
6.
International Fire Code (IFC)
7.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
8.
Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS)
9.
US Department of Labor
a)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA)
Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
10.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
B.
Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these
requirements, report the matter to the Engineer for clarification.
AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) / TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS
(TAS)
A.
Install all work to conform with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA) and the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). Where conflicts occur
between these two standards, the TAS shall govern.
B.
Obtain documentation referencing these standards, and install work in strict
accordance with them. Before installing any work where it is unclear as to the
exact requirements of the standards, obtain a ruling from the Architect or
15000-1
Engineer for an interpretation of the requirements.
C.
1.5
The following is a general outline of requirements for mechanical and plumbing
items. These items are for general reference only. Consult the original standard
for exact requirements. These items include but are not limited to the following:
1.
Thermostats and other controls:
a)
Maximum mounting height to the top of the device is 48 inches.
2.
Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers:
a)
Adults - primary users are 16 years and older: Lower fountain
spout mounted at 36 inches above floor.
3.
Water Closets - flush controls
a)
In all cases, whether the flush device is a flush valve or a flush
tank, install the device such that the flush controls are mounted on
the wide side of the toilet area.
b)
Install so that flush controls are no higher than 44 inches above
the floor.
4.
Lavatories and Sinks
a)
Refer to architectural for fixture mounting heights.
5.
Lavatories and Sinks - exposed pipes and surfaces
a)
Insulate water supplies and risers as well as p-traps and tailpieces
with pre-formed insulating covers.
b)
Install offset tailpieces to maintain knee clearance at least 27
inches high and 19 inches deep.
GENERAL:
A.
In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these
specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by
particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally
accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable
manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines
and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building
necessitate deviating from these standards.
B.
All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in
finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas
that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise
specifically indicated or directed.
C.
Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces,
where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms
where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the
drawings or required.
D.
All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the
building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls,
ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this
requirement.
E.
The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and
ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot
lines and other installation details. Carefully lay out work at the site to conform to
the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to
avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the
15000-2
manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an
integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
1.6
F.
The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment
items, etc. Determine the exact location of each item by reference to the general
plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc.,
by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections.
G.
The Contractor is responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus
into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to
install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he
shall arrange for such space with the Engineer. The Contractor shall make such
necessary changes at his own expense.
H.
Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, and
material in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the
chases and walls. The following order shall govern:
1.
Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers.
2.
Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
3.
Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and
whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
4.
Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as
diffusers, grilles, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
I.
The Contractor understands that the work described herein and shown on the
accompanying drawings results in a finished and working job, and any item
required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically
mentioned or not.
J.
Examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these
documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not
indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, notify the Engineer in sufficient
time to clarify before bidding.
DIMENSIONS:
A.
1.7
INSPECTION OF SITE:
A.
1.8
Before ordering any material or doing any work, verify all dimensions, including
elevations, and be responsible for the correctness of the same. Submit any
difference found to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the
work.
The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical
installations. Inspect the existing installations and be thoroughly acquainted with
conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying
the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and
underground serving to and from that structure.
ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRING OF HVAC MOTORS AND MOTOR-OPERATED
EQUIPMENT:
A.
Control wiring of HVAC motors and motor-operated equipment:
B.
General requirements:
15000-3
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
C.
Responsibilities of Division 15 (Mechanical):
1.
Furnish and set in place, ready for electrical connection, all HVAC motors
and motor-operated HVAC equipment unless specifically noted otherwise.
2.
Provide and set in place all HVAC control devices, such as relays,
thermostats, electrically operated valves and related items.
3.
Provide and install all HVAC system control wiring.
D.
Responsibilities of Division 16 (Electrical):
1.
Furnish, mount and connect to safety and disconnect switches for fan-coil
units, pumps, fans and similar HVAC equipment not furnished from the
factory with integral safety or disconnect switches.
2.
Connect to speed switches factory furnished on fractional horsepower fancoil units, convectors and similar equipment. Division 16 is not required to
provide field installed speed switches unless specifically noted on the
Drawings.
3.
Refer to the Drawings for specific or unusual connection arrangements.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
A.
1.10
1.11
It is the intent of these specifications to provide a clear delineation of
responsibilities for the providing of electrical control wiring.
Coordinate divisions 15 and 16 with each other to insure that all control
wiring is provided as described.
Furnish all required items under the contract, with responsibilities of
specific items as described hereafter, or in Division 16 Specifications.
While these specifications indicate the contract responsibilities of the
various Divisions, they do not prevent job-site mutually agreed upon
revisions or modifications to these responsibilities provided that ultimate
contract responsibilities are retained as described in the Specifications.
All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as
recommended by the manufacturer.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
A.
All materials are new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. All
materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established
a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear
their label.
B.
Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified,
submit a sample to the Engineer before proceeding.
C.
The Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered
in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the
Engineer's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved
and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by
visual inspection.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:
A.
Where a definite material of a specific manufacturer is mentioned in these
specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard of quality of the
product or item to be used on the project.
15000-4
B.
1.12
It is recognized that acceptable materials are offered by manufacturers other than
those named in the specifications. All request for substitution of materials,
products and equipment shall be made in writing to the Engineer at least five
working days prior to the bid date. Requests made after that time or not made in
writing will not be considered.
1.
Furnish complete descriptive literature and complete operation and
performance data on all substitute materials.
2.
Include in the information a complete list of deviations of the requested
item from the specified item.
3.
The Engineer will investigate such requests for substitutions, and issue
any acceptance of substitution by addendum.
4.
Substitutions which are requested and which are allowed will be made
known by the Engineer in addendum form prior to bid.
5.
Approval to substitute an item does not constitute acceptance of the
product to be used on the project or the omission of the submittal process.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A.
NOTE: Submittals not in compliance with the following requirements will be
summarily rejected.
B.
The Engineer reserves the right to directly charge the Contractor for time and
material costs, at standard hourly rates, if more than two (2) submittals of the
same class, type of materials, or equipment is required to obtain approval.
C.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer.
Coordinate submission of related items.
D.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from
the Contractor.
E.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations
which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
F.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous
submission.
G.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.
H.
Submittal Format:
1.
Submit all shop drawings at one time.
2.
The contractor may submit hard copies of submittals or electronic files as
directed by the architect. In either case, the contractor shall be
responsible for providing the owner with a complete and corrected
submittal at the end of the contract incorporating any and all review
comments.
3.
Hard Copies of Submittals:
a)
Bind in a three-ring binder with each section indexed according to
the specifications and separate from other sections.
4.
Electronic Submittals:
a)
Submit on a single CD or USB Flash Drive.
b)
All files shall be compiled into a single pdf portfolio with each
section indexed according to the specifications.
15000-5
1)
5.
6.
7.
8.
Individual files will NOT be accepted, and the entire
submittal will be summarily rejected.
Identify Project, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, subcontractor and
supplier.
Index each section according to the specifications and separate from
other sections.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying that review,
approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent
construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with
the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
Provide a 2 inch x 5 inch space for the Engineer's review stamp on hard
copies of submittals.
I.
Product Data
1.
Product data to be job specific.
a)
Catalogue cut sheets providing only generic information will not be
accepted
b)
Equipment selections shall indicate actual performance of
equipment, corrected for jobsite conditions, altitude, temperature
and pressures.
2.
Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking
for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed
in the contract documents. Provide copies and distribute in accordance
with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for record documents
purposes.
3.
Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two
copies which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.
4.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other
data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information
specific to this Project.
5.
Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection
requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional
equipment and appliances.
6.
After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article
above and provide copies for record documents.
J.
Manufacturer's Instructions
1.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting,
and finishing, to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities
specified for Product Data.
2.
Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or
installation.
K.
Manufacturer's Field Reports
1.
Submit reports for the Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract
administrator or for the Owner.
2.
Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for
information.
3.
Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents.
15000-6
1.13
PROTECTION OF APPARATUS:
A.
1.14
PERMITS, FEE, ETC.:
A.
1.15
Perform the various tests as specified and required by the Engineer and as
required by the State and local authorities. Furnish all fuel and materials
necessary for making tests.
CLEANING
A.
1.17
Arrange for a permit from the local authority. Arrange for all utility services,
including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. Pay any charges
made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, including
charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. Pay any inspection fees or
other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these
specifications.
TESTING:
A.
1.16
Take precautions necessary to properly protect new apparatus from damage.
Erect temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open
on the site. Crib apparatus above the floor of the construction. Cover apparatus in
the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. The Engineer
reserves the right to reject any equipment or component which has not been
properly protected.
At all times during the progress of the work, keep the premises clean and free of
unnecessary materials and debris. Clear any designated areas or area of
materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, remove from the
premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving
the premises free of all debris and construction dust.
COORDINATION OF TRADES:
A.
Items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be
coordinated with Division 16 for:
1.
Voltage
2.
Phase
3.
Ampacity
4.
No. and size of wires
5.
Wiring diagrams
6.
Starter size, details and location
7.
Control devices and details
B.
Coordinate items furnished under various sections which require plumbing
connections for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel,
clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc.
C.
Insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job
requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish.
D.
Coordinate items installed in/on finished ceilings with the ceiling construction.
Conform to the reflected ceiling plan and secure details and/or samples of the
ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility.
15000-7
E.
1.18
1.19
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A.
Perform all construction modification and cutting required to install the work. No
cutting of any structural member is permitted without specific permission from the
Engineer.
B.
Patching shall be done by the Contractor under the section for which the trade is
specified.
PAINTING:
A.
1.20
Seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions
or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect
a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls,
floors or partitions.
ACCESS PANELS:
A.
1.22
All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division 9. Following is a
general outline of the required work for Divisions 15.
1.
When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, touch
up and give one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of
machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed
surfaces.
2.
Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports
and miscellaneous metal.
3.
Paint all exposed sheet metal.
4.
Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment,
etc. Size surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained.
5.
Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare
metal or insulation surface is visible.
6.
Paint all surfaces above or behind perforated return air grilles or other
open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint.
SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.:
A.
1.21
Install all items specified tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in
relation to the work of other trades.
Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future
access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained
through the removable ceiling or through other means, provide Milcor Style "M"
access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for
access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc.
USE OF SYSTEMS:
A.
New Installations:
1.
Do not operate mechanical equipment during construction to provide
heating or cooling to the space. Make provisions to provide temporary
heat during the construction process.
2.
Under no circumstances shall the air handling equipment be run while wall
construction is underway in any portion of the building. Take any
precautions required to prevent the dust from drywall construction from
15000-8
3.
4.
B.
1.23
1.25
Portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning
system will remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the
indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, determine those
portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid
interference with the installations of new work. Relocate existing installations
which interfere with new installations.
1.
Relocate existing plumbing piping where it interferes with the installation
of new work.
2.
Relocate existing piping, ductwork where it interferes with the installation
of new work.
ROUGH-IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT:
A.
The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these
specifications. Rough-in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in
another section of the specifications or by the Owner. Refer to all drawings and
other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new
equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required
equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment.
B.
Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different
from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Engineer and finally
connect as directed by the Engineer.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
A.
1.26
Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner,
carefully examined each system and if ductwork is dirty, clean by men skilled in
that type of work.
1.
Duct cleaning methods shall be approved by the Engineer.
2.
Replace all filters and put in first class condition.
RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:
A.
1.24
contaminating the ductwork or other portions of the air handling system.
In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary
filters over air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect
outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case.
Except for operation of equipment to prove its performance and to adjust
and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort
of construction workers.
In cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various
equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper
operation of each item of equipment and of each system during the balancing and
adjusting of systems.
OPERATING MANUALS:
A.
Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers.
B.
Include the following data:
1.
Catalogue data of all equipment.
2.
Shop drawings of all equipment.
15000-9
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.27
GUARANTEE:
A.
1.28
Temperature control drawings (reduced in size)
Start-up instructions for major equipment.
Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment.
Wiring diagrams.
Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment.
Parts list for all items.
Name and address of each vendor.
Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and
equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by
the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period shall be
repaired and/or replaced. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate.
COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Before acceptance and final, furnish:
1.
Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished
for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during
installation of the work.
2.
All manufacturers' guarantees.
3.
All operating manuals.
4.
Test and Balance Report.
END OF SECTION
15000-10
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes pipe and equipment supports, hangers, anchors, bases sleeves
and the sealing of work to adjacent construction.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 3 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Execution requirements for
placement of inserts and sleeves in concrete forms specified by this
section.
2.
Division 3 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for
placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section.
REFERENCES
A.
ASME B31.5 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Refrigeration Piping
B.
ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
C.
MSS SP58 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry) - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
D.
MSS SP69 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry) - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
E.
MSS SP89 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry) - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
F.
NFPA 13 (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Sprinkler
Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
C.
Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser
support hangers.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and assembly
of components.
15060-1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
1.7
Perform Work in accordance with code for piping support and in conformance
with NFPA 13 for support of sprinkler piping.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Carpenter & Paterson Inc.
2.
Creative Systems Inc.
3.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
4.
Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc.
5.
Michigan Hanger Co.
6.
Superior Valve Co.
7.
Hilti.
8.
Grinnell.
B.
Fire Protection Piping:
1.
Conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
3.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
4.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and
hanger rods.
5.
Wall Support: Welded steel bracket.
6.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
7.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
C.
Plumbing Piping - DWV:
1.
Conform to MSS SP69.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
3.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
4.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and
hanger rods.
5.
Wall Support: Welded steel bracket.
15060-2
6.
7.
8.
2.2
D.
Plumbing Piping - Water:
1.
Conform to MSS SP69.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
3.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
4.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
5.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers,
hanger rods, and tubing clamps.
6.
Wall Support: Welded steel bracket.
7.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
9.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
10.
Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.
E.
Refrigerant Piping:
1.
Conform to MSS SP69.
2.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and
hanger rods.
3.
Pipe/Strut Tubing clamps: Zinc plated steel strut clamp, bolt with nylon
insert locknut, neoprene pipe cushion insert to surround pipe and isolate
clamp from pipe.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.3
2.4
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or
continuous threaded. ASTM F593.
ANCHORS
A.
Expansion anchors are flush or shell type meeting Federal Specification FF-S325, Group VIII Type 1, for expansion shield anchors.
B.
ASTM B633, zinc plated.
C.
Hilti HDI; HDI-L.
INSERTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hilti.
15060-3
B.
2.5
2.6
2.7
Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for
threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for
attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
FLASHING
A.
Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.
B.
Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
C.
Lead Flashing:
1.
Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead
2.
Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.
D.
Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
EQUIPMENT CURBS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Thycurb.
2.
Custom Curb.
3.
Approved Equal.
B.
Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch
cant, variable step to match root insulation, factory installed wood nailer.
ROOF MOUNTED UTILITY HUBS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
REACH Manufacturing Inc., No Exceptions.
B.
Utility Hub:
1.
Hub shall be constructed of steel with bolt down removable access lid.
Unit shall be 14” x 14” x 17” completely insulated using 1/2" armaflex.
2.
Hub shall have factory mounted safety disconnect switch to serve each
condensing unit as indicated on drawings. Coordinate electrical service
requirements with actual equipment provided.
3.
Hub shall have integral 120V, 20 amp GFCI receptacle with weather
cover.
4.
Hub shall have factory installed Swagelok connections for refrigerant
liquid and suction piping to serve each condensing unit as indicated on
drawings. Coordinate size of refrigerant piping with equipment
manufacturer.
C.
Channel:
1.
Utility hub shall be mounted on 10-3/4” diameter steel channel.
2.
Channel shall extend 20 inches above finished roof.
3.
Channel shall be factory insulated with 1/2" armaflex to provide a smooth
raceway for field installation of all electrical work and refrigerant piping.
4.
Secure channel to structural members as detailed on drawings.
5.
Stainless Steel pipe clamps to secure boot to cover and pipe.
15060-4
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
PIPING ON ROOF
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Mapa Products MS-4, MS-5
B.
Product:
1.
Fiberglass reinforced 6/6 nylon base with 3/8” stainless steel threaded
rod. Solid rubber roller with adjustable height. Neoprene or rubber base
pad depending on pipe size.
2.
MS-4 for pipe size less than 2-1/2”
3.
MS-5 for pipe size less than 4”
C.
Installation:
1.
Support steel gas piping on roof.
2.
Install as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.
Maintain 8 inches of clearance between roof deck and pipe.
4.
Spacing:
a)
Pipe 3/4 inches to 1 inch: 8 feet.
b)
1-1/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches: 10 feet.
c)
2 to 3 inches: 6 feet
PIPE ROOF PENETRATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
ChemLink ChemCurb System
B.
Product:
1.
ChemCurb: exterior rings, straights, and corners constructed of gray
polyester resin.
2.
M-1: mastic for bonding ChemCurb to roof.
3.
1-Part: pourable 100% rubber sealer resistant to deterioration, melting,
and shrinking.
DUCT HANGERS
A.
Support ductwork in finished areas with strap hangers in accordance with
SMACNA.
B.
Support exposed spiral pipe ductwork with Gripple stainless steel wire rope
hangers, secured with Gripple wire rope locking devices.
1.
Size wire rope in accordance with manufacturer's loading
recommendations.
SLEEVES
A.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized
steel.
B.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and
Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe.
15060-5
C.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and
Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D.
Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
E.
Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
F.
Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
G.
Sealant: Acrylic Intumescent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
ANCHORS
A.
Install in holes drilled by carbide tipped bits.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
INSERTS
A.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B.
Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides
of reinforced concrete beams.
C.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe
over 4 inches.
D.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B.
Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
C.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E.
Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum
spacing between hangers.
F.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
G.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
H.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
I.
Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
15060-6
3.4
3.5
3.6
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending
6 inches beyond supported equipment. Broom finish with chamfered corners.
B.
Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring
equipment.
C.
Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
structure.
D.
Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
FLASHING
A.
Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork
penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B.
Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof
surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on
sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn
flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal.
C.
Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches
clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain
clamp device.
D.
Seal floor, shower, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.
E.
Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 12 inches minimum high above
roofing surface. Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach
Counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs.
Flatten and solder joints.
F.
Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm
collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
SLEEVES
A.
Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and
contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
C.
Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
D.
Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space
between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk
airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of
penetration.
E.
Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
15060-7
3.7
SCHEDULES
A.
Steel and Copper Pipe Hanger Spacing
PIPE SIZE
Inches
½ to 1-1/4
1-1/2 to 2
2-1/2 to 4
MAX. HANGER SPACING
Feet
6.0
10
10
ROD DIAMETER
Inches
1/4
3/8
1/2
END OF SECTION
15060-8
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes nameplates, tags, stencils and pipe markers.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 9 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting
specified by this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product
required.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special
procedures, and installation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include
valve tag numbers.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
NAMEPLATES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Craftmark Identification Systems.
2.
Safety Sign Co.
3.
Seton Identification Products.
4.
Marking Services Inc.
B.
Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on
black background. Minimum 1-1/2” x 4” size with 16 point Helvetica font.
TAGS
A.
Metal Tags:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Seton Identification Products.
b)
Marking Services Inc.
15075-1
2.
2.3
2.4
2.5
Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches with smooth
edges.
B.
Information Tags:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Seton Identification Products.
b)
Marking Services Inc.
2.
Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and
message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon
ties.
C.
Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized
aluminum frame.
STENCILS
A.
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1.
Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: ½ inch high letters.
2.
2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high
letters.
3.
Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high
letters.
4.
Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
B.
Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME
A13.1.
PIPE MARKERS
A.
Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Seton Setmark.
b)
Craftmark Identification Systems.
c)
Marking Services Inc.
2.
Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe
or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring
fastener.
C.
Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:
1.
Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches
wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service, with continuous
aluminum strip for electronic tracing.
TRACER WIRE
A.
Product:
1.
Provide and install 16 gauge bare copper tracer wire along the entire
length of buried piping beyond the building exterior wall.
2.
Wire to be one piece - no splices
3.
Install 12 inches above piping.
15075-2
4.
5.
2.6
bring each end of wire up to grade.
Termination:
a)
Sewer lines: terminate at building wall, clamp to minimum 6 foot
3/4 inch rebar set in ground adjacent to pipe entry into building.
Rebar to be exposed 2 inches above ground.
b)
Gas lines: terminate at gas rise at building wall and at gas meter
above grade. Clamp wire to riser pipe
c)
Water line: terminate with minimum 12 inch excess looped in
water meter box. Terminate inside building above grade at water
entry, clamped to piping.
PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLORS:
A.
Exposed insulated piping identified by color coding along entire exposed length
with colored pvc jacket. Refer to Section 15080.
B.
Exposed non-insulated piping identified by color painting along entire exposed
length. Painting by Division 9.
1.
Gas: black with white stenciled letters.
2.
Fire Protection: red with white stenciled letters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 9 for stencil painting.
INSTALLATION
A.
Apply stencil painting in accordance with Division 9.
B.
Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
C.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or
adhesive.
D.
Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal
with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before
applying labels.
E.
Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by
location.
F.
Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,
directly above buried pipe.
G.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape
pipe markers.
1.
Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
15075-3
3.
4.
3.3
Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including
risers and drops.
Locate identification adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of
penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
H.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I.
Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit
identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit,
at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
J.
Identify duct mounted control dampers with plastic nameplates. Indicate damper
service.
K.
Equipment Identification: Use plastic nameplates to identify all equipment,
including but not limited to:
1.
Rooftop Units
2.
Fans
3.
Fan Coil Units
4.
Heat Pumps
5.
Pumps
6.
Water Heaters
IDENTIFICATION PAINTING OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A.
Paint natural gas piping exposed in mechanical spaces. Paint piping along the
entire exposed length. Color shall be safety yellow. Include lettered legend with
stenciled painting in black.
B.
Paint natural gas piping exposed on exterior of buildings. Paint piping along the
entire exposed length. Color shall be as directed by architect.
C.
Paint fire protection piping exposed in any space. Paint piping along the entire
exposed length. Color shall be safety red. Include lettered legend with stenciled
painting in white.
END OF SECTION
15075-4
SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes
1.
Ductwork insulation
2.
Duct liner
3.
Thermal insulation for piping systems
4.
Vapor retarders, jackets and accessories.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 9 – Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting
insulation jackets and covering specified by this section.
2.
Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports: Execution requirements for
inserts for placement by this section.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements
and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate
Apparatus.
B.
ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating
Cement.
C.
ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
D.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements
and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter
Apparatus.
E.
ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
F.
ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
G.
ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and
Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).
H.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
I.
ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation
(Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
J.
ASTM C1126- Standard Specification for Preformed Closed Cell Phenolic Foam
Pipe and Board Insulation.
15080 - 1
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
K.
ASTM C1136 – Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
L.
ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
M.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
N.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
O.
ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
P.
ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic
Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
Q.
NAIMA (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association) - National
Insulation Standards.
R.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics and list of
materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that
ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum five years experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
B.
Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install insulation outside ambient conditions required by manufacturer of
each product.
15080 - 2
1.7
B.
Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24
hours.
C.
Apply insulation to chilled water piping at room temperature. Do not apply to
cold, wet piping. Vapor seal before allowing chilled water in piping system
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Knauf Duct Wrap
2.
Johns-Manville Microlite
3.
Owens-Corning
B.
Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1.
‘K’ value : ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F .
2.
Density: 1.0 pcf
3.
Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F .
4.
Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1.
Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
3.
Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D.
Vapor Barrier Tape:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Compac Model FSK.
b)
Ideal Model FSK.
2.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized
film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
3.
Tape shall be minimum 3" wide.
E.
Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Childers Model CP-10.
b)
Fosters Model 36-10.
c)
Marathon Model 650.
2.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black
color.
F.
Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage .
GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Knauf Duct Liner
15080 - 3
2.
3.
2.3
2.4
Johns-Manville Permacote Linacoustic
Owens-Corning
B.
Insulation: ASTM C1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with acrylic polymer
meeting ASTM G21 impregnated surface and edge coat.
1.
‘K’ Value: ASTM C1071, maximum 0.25 at 75 degrees F .
2.
Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F .
3.
Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm .
4.
Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: 0.70 for 1 inch thickness.
C.
Adhesive:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Childers Model CP-89.
b)
Fosters Model 85-23.
c)
Marathon Model 224.
2.
Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
D.
Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied with integral head.
GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Knauf
2.
Johns-Manville
3.
Owens-Corning
B.
Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1.
‘K’ value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F .
2.
Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F .
3.
Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1.
ASTM C921, White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to
aluminized film.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
D.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Childers CP-82
b)
Fosters 85-20
2.
Compatible with insulation.
E.
Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1.
ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
CELLULAR FOAM PIPE INSULATION
A.
Manufacturer: Armstrong AP Armaflex
B.
Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.
1.
‘K’ value: ASTM C177; 0.27 at 75 degrees F .
2.
Minimum service temperature: -40 degrees F .
15080 - 4
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Maximum service temperature: 220 degrees F .
Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1056; 3.5 percent (pipe) by
volume, 6.0 percent (sheet) by volume.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.10 perm-inches.
C.
Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
D.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive:
1.
Manufacturer: Armstrong 520
2.
Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
JACKETS
A.
Aluminum Jacket - Indoor: ASTM B209.
1.
Thickness: 0.020 inch sheet.
2.
Finish: Smooth.
3.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4.
Fittings: 0.024 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
5.
Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick stainless steel.
B.
Aluminum Jacket - Outdoor: ASTM B209.
1.
Thickness: 0.024 inch sheet.
2.
Finish: Embossed.
3.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4.
Fittings: 0.024 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
5.
Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick stainless steel.
6.
Joint Sealer: Silicon
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying
insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
INSTALLATION – PIPING
A.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
B.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C.
Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1.
Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers,
flexible connections and expansion joints.
D.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1.
Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive
15080 - 5
2.
3.
3.3
adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor
barrier mastic.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material
and thickness as adjacent pipe.
Install PVC fitting covers and vapor barrier adhesive.
E.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1.
Provide standard jackets, without vapor. Secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure
with outward clinch expanding staples.
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and
thickness as adjoining pipe.
3.
Install PVC fitting covers.
4.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate
flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
F.
Inserts and Shields:
1.
Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2.
Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and
inserts.
3.
Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish
jacket.
4.
Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and
contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5.
Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density
insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
a)
Hamfab 20 lb. density H-blocks
G.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe
penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire
separations, refer to Fire Stopping Specifications.
H.
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces;
1.
Finish with aluminum jacket as indicated on drawings.
I.
Exterior Applications:
1.
Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with
insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with
glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum
jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o’clock position on the side of
horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water or on the
bottom side of horizontal equipment.
INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK
A.
Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1.
Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2.
Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct
penetrations.
15080 - 6
4.
3.4
Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers,
flexible connections, and expansion joints.
B.
Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
1.
Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket.
2.
Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and
seal ends of insulation.
C.
External Duct Insulation Application:
1.
Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with
vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2.
Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires.
3.
Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical
fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze
hangers and insert spacers.
4.
Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor
retarder adhesive.
5.
Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to
allow operation without disturbing wrapping.
D.
Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1.
Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2.
Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. SMACNA Standards
for spacing.
3.
Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4.
Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5.
Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
6.
Install metal nosing on all upstream sides of duct liner in systems with
velocity greater than 1500 fpm.
SCHEDULES
A.
Ductwork and Air Handling Systems:
1.
Rectangular Supply Ducts - Lined:
a)
Glass Fiber Duct Liner, flexible - 1-1/2 inches thick to achieve R-6
2.
Round Supply Ducts- Wrapped:
a)
Glass Fiber, flexible - 2 inches thick
b)
Vapor seal all joint and penetrations.
3.
Return Ducts - Lined:
a)
Glass Fiber Duct Liner, flexible - 1-1/2 inches thick to achieve R-6
B.
Plumbing Systems:
1.
Domestic Hot Water Supply - 140 deg F and lower:
a)
Glass Fiber Insulation:
b)
Pipe Size Range: 1-1/2 inches and less.
1)
Thickness: 1 inch
c)
Pipe Size Range: 2 inches and larger
1)
Thickness: 1-1/2 inches
2.
Domestic Hot Water Recirculation - 140 deg F and lower:
a)
Glass Fiber Insulation:
15080 - 7
b)
3.
C.
Pipe Size Range: 1-1/2 inches and less.
1)
Thickness: 1 inch
c)
Pipe Size Range: 2 inches and larger
1)
Thickness: 1-1/2 inches
Domestic Cold Water:
a)
Glass Fiber Insulation:
b)
Pipe Size Range: All sizes.
1)
Thickness: 1/2 inch .
Cooling Systems:
1.
Refrigerant Suction:
a)
Cellular Foam Insulation:
b)
Pipe Size Range: All sizes - thickness: 3/4 inch.
2.
Cold Condensate Drains:
a)
Cellular Foam Insulation:
b)
Pipe Size Range: All sizes - thickness: 3/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
15080 - 8
SECTION 15310
FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Division 9 - Painting: Preparation and painting of fire protection piping systems.
B.
Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Piping identification.
C.
Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design.
REFERENCES
A.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.
B.
ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.
C.
ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
D.
ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
E.
ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded.
F.
ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends.
G.
ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
H.
ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
I.
ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings.
J.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and
Seamless.
K.
ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
L.
ASTM A795 - Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
M.
NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
N.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 15000: Procedures for submittals.
15310 - 1
1.5
1.6
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data
and ratings.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor
and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and
support details, and piping connections.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag
numbering.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare
parts lists.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
1.8
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
section five years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to UL and FM.
B.
Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.
C.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and AWS D10.9.
D.
Valves: Bear UL and FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and
pressure rating marked on valve body.
E.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in
place until installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A135 UL listed, threadable, light wall; Schedule 10 black for
pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.
1.
Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ASME B16.25,
buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ASME
B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ASME B16.11, forged steel socket
welded and threaded.
15310 - 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ASME
B16.4, threaded fittings.
Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings ASTM A47.
Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to
engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts,
nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop
and O-ring pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent
mechanical engagement onto pipe.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Refer to Section 15060.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems.
B.
Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure.
Maintain gradient.
C.
Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and
other work.
D.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.
F.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,
or connected equipment.
G.
Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers
to maintain top of pipe level.
H.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe
support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
I.
Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
J.
Provide sleeves when penetrating footings floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve
penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
15310 - 3
K.
When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system
components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system.
Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for
servicing are consistently provided.
L.
Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and
linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
M.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective
coatings after installation.
N.
Provide gate or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
O.
Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
END OF SECTION
15310 - 4
SECTION 15325
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
B.
System design, installation, and certification.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.
B.
Section 15310 – Fire Protection Piping
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
B.
FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
E.
UL 199 - Automatic Sprinklers.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
Modify existing fire sprinkler system in Elementary/Junior High School as
required to meet proper coverage in renovated areas as required by NFPA 13.
All renovated areas are indicated on drawings. Contractor shall survey existing
system and provide required modifications.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15000.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including
manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in
details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler
locations coordinated with ceiling installation.
2.
Indicate detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers,
components and accessories.
D.
Submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to authority
having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer.
15325-1
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations
of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or
exceeds specified requirements and code requirements.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing
requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, and location and numbers of service depot.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
section with minimum three years experience.
D.
Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced
in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to UL and FM.
B.
Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
C.
Equipment and Components: Bear UL or FM label or marking.
D.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
1.10
Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation.
Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13.
B.
Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.
C.
Provide metal storage cabinet located adjacent to alarm valve.
15325-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SPRINKLERS
A.
Suspended Ceiling:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Central
b)
Grinnell
2.
Type: Quick Response, Semi-recessed pendant type with matching push
on escutcheon plate to match existing sprinkler heads.
3.
Finish: Chrome plated.
4.
Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
5.
Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
B.
Exposed Area Type:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Central
b)
Grinnell
2.
Type: Quick response upright type.
3.
Finish: Chrome plated.
4.
Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
C.
Sidewall Type:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Central
b)
Grinnell
2.
Type: Quick Response, Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with
matching push on escutcheon plate.
3.
Finish: Chrome plated.
4.
Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.
5.
Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
D.
Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with NFPA 13.
B.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C.
Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D.
Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
E.
Center sprinklers in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction
variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements.
F.
Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates,
and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after
painting. Replace painted sprinklers.
15325-3
3.2
G.
Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
H.
Install guards on sprinklers within 7 feet above floor.
I.
Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshall or authority having jurisdiction.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm
system.
END OF SECTION
15325-4
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1.
Sanitary sewer.
2.
Domestic water.
3.
Natural gas.
4.
Compressed air.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports
B.
Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.
C.
Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation.
REFERENCES
A.
AGA Z21.22 - Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water
Supply Systems.
B.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
C.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
D.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
E.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
F.
ASME B16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Sovent Drainage
Systems.
G.
ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.
H.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
I.
ASTM A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
J.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
K.
ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.
L.
ASTM B68 - Seamless Copper Tube
M.
ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube
N.
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
15410-1
1.4
1.5
O.
ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube
P.
ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).
Q.
ASTM D1785 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and
120.
R.
ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
S.
ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
T.
ASTM D2665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe
and Fittings.
U.
ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
V.
ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pipe and Fittings.
W.
ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
X.
ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
Y.
ASTM F809 - Large Diameter Polybutylene Plastic Pipe.
Z.
AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
AA.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
BB.
MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
CC.
NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
DD.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15000.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and
accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data
and ratings.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
1.6
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with International Plumbing Code, International
Building Code and local amendments.
B.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
15410-2
1.7
C.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX.
D.
Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM
specification, water pressure rating.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
1.9
Perform Work in accordance with International Plumbing Code and local
amendments.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for
damage.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in
place until installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,
completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
2.2
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
2.3
PVC Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1.
Fittings: PVC, ASTM D3311
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
2.4
PVC Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1.
Fittings: PVC conform to ASTM D2665 and be listed by NSF to Standard
14..
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
PVC Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034
1.
Fittings: PVC.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, hard drawn, type K.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2.
Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
15410-3
2.5
WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A.
2.6
WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
2.7
2.11
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged
steel welding type.
2.
Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
2.10
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
2.
Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A.
2.9
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
2.
Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING - PLENUM SPACE
A.
2.8
Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, hard drawn, Type K.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2.
Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged
steel welding type.
2.
Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A.
Pipe Size 3 inches and Under:
1.
Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2.
Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,
copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
DOMESTIC WATER BALL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Nibco Model T-585-66-LF
2.
Milwaukee #UPBA-400S
B.
Construction, 2 inches and smaller: NSF/ANSI 61, Lead Free, MSS SP-110,
Class 150, 600 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, stainless steel, full port, teflon
seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stainless steel stem, lever handle
threaded ends.
15410-4
2.12
2.13
COMPRESSED AIR VALVES
A.
Ball Valves:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Nibco T-580-70
2.
MSS SP-110, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular
port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle,
threaded ends.
B.
Air Outlets:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Foster Manufacturing Co. DM Series.
b)
Approved Equal
2.
Quick Connector: 3/4 inch connection size, brass, Buna-N seal, pin type
locking mechanism, automatic connect type, Industrial Interchange Style.
GAS VALVES:
A.
Indoor Application:
1.
Manufacturer:
a)
Up to and including 2 inches: McDonald Figure 10552
2.
AGA Certified, 25 lb WOG, Flat/Tee head, top check, plug type, Bronze
body and plug, threaded ends
B.
Outdoor Application
1.
Manufacturer:
a)
Up to and including 1-1/2 inches: Homestead Figure 601,
1)
AGA Certified, 200 lb WOG, wrench operated square
head, lubricated plug with check, semi-steel, threaded
ends
b)
2 inches and above: Homestead Fig. 612, Resun R-1431
1)
AGA Certified, 200 lb. WOG, straightway, wrench
operated, lubricated plug, rectangular port, semi-steel,
flanged ends
2.
Description:
a)
ANSI B2.1 - American Standard Taper Pipe Threads.
b)
Faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 125# Cast Iron
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
c)
ANSI B16.10 - Face to Face Dimensions of Ferrous Flanged End
Valves; Class 125. multiple port and round port valves not
covered by this specification.
d)
ASTM - A-126 Grade B - Body and Plug Material
e)
lubricated plug type, without taper, and with close tolerance
between the plug and body sealing surfaces.
f)
stem seal of reinforced Teflon.
g)
leak-proof, spring loaded ball and lubricant sealed check valve;
h)
combination lubricant screw and button head fitting to prevent
foreign matter from being forced into lubricant system.
i)
Valve plugs floated on low-friction Teflon surfaces
j)
port area equal to 100% of the area of standard pipe (or standard
opening if desired).
15410-5
k)
l)
2.14
SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
2.15
2.16
Up To and Including 3 inches:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Nibco Model T-413-Y-LF
b)
Milwaukee.
c)
Crane.
2.
NSF/ANSI 61, Lead Free, MSS SP-80, Class 150, bronze body and cap,
PTFE swing disc with renewable seat, threaded ends.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER BALANCING VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bell & Gossett series CB
B.
NSF/ANSI 61, brass body ASTM B283, 304 stainless steel balancing valve,
memory stops, rated for 250 psi at 225 degrees F, with 2 P/T ports for differential
pressure measurement.
RELIEF VALVES
A.
2.17
constructed that lubricant system has sufficient pressure to force
lubricant over all seating surfaces.
Extruded Lubricant around stem is to be positive indication that
lubricant system is full, and that there had been a minimum
contamination of line fluids.
Temperature and Pressure Relief:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Watts Model 100XL.
2.
AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and
springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum
210 degrees F, capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labelled.
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS
A.
General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Hilti CS 240
2.
Silicon based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent
properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
B.
DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Hilti CS 240
2.
Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration
and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479
with metal collars.
15410-6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar
metals.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and
perpendicular to walls.
D.
Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use
of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,
or connected equipment.
G.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for
installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section
15080.
H.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I.
Install buried outdoor piping with tracer wire as specified in 15075.
J.
Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than
2 ft of cover.
K.
Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
L.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,
brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M.
Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for
finish painting. Refer to Division 9.
N.
Excavate in accordance with Division 2 for work of this Section.
O.
Backfill in accordance with Division 2 for work of this Section.
15410-7
3.4
3.5
3.6
P.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
Q.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
R.
Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
S.
Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
APPLICATION
A.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B.
Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder
adapters to pipe.
C.
Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.
D.
Provide ball valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.
E.
Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum.
Maintain gradients.
B.
Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.
TESTING
A.
Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted,
or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible.
B.
Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions
during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing.
C.
Domestic Water Lines Interior:
1.
Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks
whatsoever.
D.
Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines:
1.
Test with water before the fixtures are installed.
2.
Water test applied to the drainage and venting system either in its
entirety or in sections.
a)
Sectional system testing:
1)
Plug each opening except the highest opening of the
section under test
2)
Fill system to be tested with water to achieve a 10 foot
head on the portion under test.
3.
Keep water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30
minutes before the inspection starts.
4.
Water shall not drop more than 1inch in 8 hours.
15410-8
E.
3.7
Gas Lines:
1.
Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except
for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints,
correct leaks and retest.
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B.
Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic
soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout
system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
D.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual
at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or
1.0 mg/L.
H.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2 percent of outlets
and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
END OF SECTION
15410-9
SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Floor drains.
B.
Catch Basins
C.
Cleanouts.
D.
Hose bibs.
E.
Hydrants.
F.
Water hammer arrestors.
G.
Interceptors.
H.
Thermostatic mixing valves.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
B.
Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.
C.
Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.
REFERENCES
A.
ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
B.
ASME A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
C.
ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
D.
ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow
Types.
E.
ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Sections.
F.
PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15000.
B.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes,
and finishes.
15430-1
C.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
1.6
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and
holes.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded
assembly views.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
FLOOR DRAINS – FD
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Wade Model W-1100.
2.
Zurn Model Z-415-B.
B.
ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage
flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickelbronze strainer.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Provide each floor drain with elastomeric PVC duckbill insert as
manufactured by Trap Guard®.
CATCH BASINS – CB
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Zurn model Z887-24.
B.
24”x24”x24”, High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) basin shall mechanically lock
into concrete surround, Class C ductile iron grate, bottom outlet adapter.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Provide each catch basin with elastomeric PVC duckbill insert as
manufactured by Trap Guard®.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exterior Surfaced Areas:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Wade Model W-6000Z.
b)
Zurn Model Z-1400-HD
2.
Round cast iron, threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with plug
and round nickel bronze scoriated tractor top.
B.
Interior Finished Floor Areas:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Wade Model W-6000
b)
Zurn Model Z-1400
15430-2
2.
C.
2.4
Interior:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
T&S Brass Model B-0737-POL.
b)
Chicago Model 387-6 w/ E27
2.
Polished chrome plated brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable
hexagonal disc, 3/4 inch FIP inlet, 3/4 inch hose thread spout, removable
tee handle, vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011.
FREEZE PROOF WALL HYDRANTS - FPWH
A.
2.6
Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Wade Model W-8460-R.
b)
Zurn Model Z-1446
2.
Line type with cast iron body with brass plug and round stainless steel
access cover secured with machine screw.
HOSE BIBS - HB
A.
2.5
Cast iron body with anchor flange, threaded adjustable housing, flanged
ferrule with plug and secured nickel bronze scoriated top.
a)
Carpeted areas: with carpet flange
1)
Wade W-6000-CF
b)
Poured or synthetic floor areas: wide flange top
1)
Wade W-6000-D
c)
Tile floor: square top
1)
Wade W-6000-TS
d)
Terrazzo Floor: no flange
1)
Wade W-6000-U
Wall Hydrant:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Wade Model W-8620
b)
Woodford
c)
Zurn
2.
ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with satin nickel bronze
wall plate, hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and integral
vacuum breaker.
WASHING MACHINE BOX - WM
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Guy Gray Model WB200
a)
16 gauge epoxy finish steel box
b)
watts Duo-Cloz ball valve for simultaneous operation of hot and
cold water.
c)
2 inch waste.
2.
Hoses:
a)
5 foot stainless steel braided hose with female hose ends for
connections to washer - hot and cold.
15430-3
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A.
Manufacturer: Sioux Chief
B.
ANSI 1010-2004; piston type, type L copper tube construction, poly-piston with
EPDM o-rings.
C.
Sized in accordance with manufacturer requirements suitable for operation in
temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F maximum 250 psi working pressure.
SAND/OIL INTERCEPTORS
A.
Manufacturer: Vaughn Conctrete Products.
B.
Construction:
1.
4" precast 4000 psi concrete with rebar reinforcing, two compartment,
1000 gallon capacity. Factory installed crossover pipe between
compartments.
2.
Provide with 24" diameter openings in tank top at each end and 18"
diameter removable inspection lid over divider, inlet and outlet opening
with pipe seals ready to accept field piping.
3.
Provide with 8" precast concrete traffic rated lid.
4.
Provide with 24" i.d. manhole risers, gas tight cast iron rings and covers.
THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVE – (SERVES WH 1-14)
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Zurn model ZW1017XL.
B.
Aqua-Gard Tempering Mixing Valve: ASSE 1017, lead-free design, cast bronze
body ASTM B 584, polysufone piston, low lead brass internal components, nitrile
elastomer seals.
THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVE – (SERVES WH 2-14)
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Bradley Corporation model S59-2025.
B.
Standard Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves: ASSE 1017, liquid-filled motor and
piston control mechanism with positive shutoff of hot water when cold water
supply is lost. Water flow is shut off in event of thermostat failure. Bronze valve
body and cap with replaceable corrosion-resistant components, including
stainless steel piston and liner. Equipped with integral check stops and
removable strainers.
1.
Inlet Water temperature: Maximum 200 deg F.
2.
Material: Bronze body, stainless steel piston and liner, and corrosionresistant interior components.
3.
Valve Body Finish: Rough bronze.
4.
Mounting Type: Surface-mounted cabinet.
C.
Cabinet: Factory-fabricated, surface mounted, powder coated steel, with hinged
door.
15430-4
2.5
COMPRESSED AIR HOSE REELS
A.
Hose Reel:
1.
Manufacturer:
a)
Samson Model 1663.
b)
No exeptions.
2.
Reels shall be constructed of powder coated carbon steel for maximum
durability.
3.
All reels shall be adjustable for wall mounting.
4.
Provide with Model 360 111 swivel wall mount bracket.
5.
Maximum capacity of 50’ 1/2” hose with quick connection.
6.
Reel shall be equipped with an extended wrap free-floating retraction
spring for longer hose length capacities.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout
plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for
rodding of drainage system.
C.
Encase exterior cleanouts in 12"x12"x4" concrete slab, flush with grade.
D.
Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E.
Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot
and cold water supply piping to each group of fixtures.
F.
Installation of air chambers is strictly prohibited in accordance with the IPC.
END OF SECTION
15430-5
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water closets.
B.
Lavatories.
C.
Sinks.
D.
Electric water coolers.
E.
Showers.
F.
Wash fountains.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports
B.
Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
C.
Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.
D.
Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z124.2 - Gel-Coated Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Resin Shower
Receptor and Shower Stall Units.
B.
ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated
Drinking Water Coolers.
C.
ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
D.
ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
E.
ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
F.
ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential
Use).
G.
ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.
H.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 15000: Procedures for submittals.
15440 - 1
B.
1.5
1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts
lists.
B.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
1.8
Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in
dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory
packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WHEEL HANDLE ¼ TURN STOPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Brass Craft model KTCR19 C
2.
No substitutions.
B.
Operating Temperature:
1.
40-150 degrees F. Intermittent to 180 degrees F.
C.
Operating Pressure:
1.
125 psi maximum.
D.
Material Specifications:
1.
Body and brass components: Chrome plated C36000 brass.
2.
Stem: Plated C36000 brass.
3.
Seats: Pure PTFE.
4.
Ball: Chrome plated C36000 brass.
5.
O-Ring: Nitrile.
6.
Handle: Chrome plated zinc die cast.
7.
Handle Screw: Zinc plated steel.
8.
Compression Sleeve: C36000 brass.
15440 - 2
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
FLEXIBLE SUPPLY RISERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Brass Craft Speedi Plumb Plus
B.
Operating Temperature:
1.
40-150 degrees F. Intermittent to 180 degrees F.
C.
Operating Pressure:
1.
125 psi maximum.
D.
Material Specifications:
1.
Nuts: C36000 brass.
2.
End fittings: C36000 brass.
3.
Braiding: Polyvinyl chloride coated polyester yarn.
4.
Tubing: EPDM rubber.
5.
Washers: Nitrile rubber.
CHROME PLATED BRASS P-TRAP
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Brass Craft
2.
McGuire
3.
Dearborn Brass
B.
Chrome-plated 17-gauge brass tubing p-trap with clean-out. Provide with brass
quarter bend, brass clean-out plug, fiber clean-out washer, rubber washers, die
cast nuts.
C.
Size:
1.
2.
Lavatory: 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch.
Sink: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch.
OFFSET WASTE WITH PERFORATED OPEN STRAINER
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Brass Craft part number 0702.
2.
McGuire part number 155WC.
B.
Polished chrome cast brass offset lavatory strainer, ADA compliant, cast brass
solid top open grid strainer, cast brass elbow and 1-1/4 inch 17 gauge offset
tailpiece.
P-1: ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A.
Fountain:
1.
Manufacturer: Elkay EZSTL8C
2.
ARI 1010; surface mounted dual height electric water cooler with
stainless steel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt flexible
bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, push button,
mounting bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser.
15440 - 3
3.
4.
5.
2.6
P-2: WALL HUNG WASHFOUNTAIN – TAS
A.
Unit:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Capacity: 8 gph of 50 degree F water with inlet at 80 degree F and room
temperature of 90 degree F.
Electrical: Maximum 410 watt compressor, cord and plug for connection
to electric wiring system including grounding connector.
TAS Compliance:
a)
Adult: Mount with lower spout at 36 inches.
b)
Provide apron on upper unit for cane detection.
Bradley Model SN2023-O-IR-TMA
a)
No substitutions
Semicircular shallow bowl washfountain with three hand washing stations
Each station complies with Texas Accessibility Standards.
B.
Bowl:
1.
All exposed materials shall be constructed of type 3204 stainless steel
polished to a #4 finish.
2.
Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated.
3.
Bowl and support tube shall be integrally welded assembly, with support
tube welded to an extruded flange from bowl.
4.
Sprayhead nozzles and infrared sensors shall be secured to unit from
inside the sprayhead module.
5.
Supply and waste connections shall be concealed within the pedestal.
6.
Refer to architectural for installation height.
C.
Service:
1.
Independent solenoid valves actuated by an infrared sensing module with
single conical transmitting beam not exceeding bowl perimeter.
2.
Each sensor to have 2-3 second turn off delay and 30-45 seconds of
continuous operation.
3.
System provided complete with waste and supply fittings, thermostatic
mixing valves with stop, strainer and check valves.
4.
Transformer: Class II UL/CSA listed, 100/24 VAC plug in type.
P-3: THREE COMPARTMENT STAINLESS STEEL SINK
A.
Fixture:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Advance Tabco model 94-3-54-18RL.
b)
No Exceptions.
2.
91”x27”x37”, 14 gauge 304 stainless steel, three 16”x20 sink
compartments with 14” water level, 1-5/8” tubular stainless steel legs,
stainless steel gussets and channels, 1” stainless steel adjustable bullet
feet, 11” high backsplash, all welded construction, 18” drain boards on
both sides of fixture.
B.
Trim:
1.
Manufacturer:
a)
T&S Brass model B0290.
15440 - 4
2.
C.
2.8
2.9
Provide (2) faucets for fixture, 8” backsplash mount, 12” gooseneck,
ceramic cartridges, indexed color lever handles, NPT femal inlets.
Accessories:
1.
Model K-15, lever drain operators for each compartment.
2.
Model K-4 supports brackets for each lever drain.
P-4: WATER CLOSET, FLOOR MOUNT, FLUSH VALVE – TAS
A.
Bowl:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
American Standard Model 3043.001
b)
Kohler.
2.
ASME A112.19.2M; floor mounted, siphon jet 16-1/2 inch bowl height,
TAS accessible, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch
top spud, china bolt caps, minimum 2 inch passageway.
B.
Sensor Operated Flush Valve:
1.
Manufacturer:
a)
Zurn ZER6000PL-HET-CPM.
b)
Sloan.
2.
ASME A112.19.2; exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with battery
operated solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over-ride button in
chrome plated plate, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker,
adjustable tailpiece, vandal resistant stop cap with set screw, sweat
solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange, maximum
1.28 gallon flush volume, 11-1/2 inch riser.
C.
Seat:
1.
Manufacturer:
a)
Bemis Model 1955 SSC
b)
Beneke 523 SS
2.
Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, and
brass bolts.
P-5: SHOWER – TAS
A.
Cabinet:
1.
Manufacturer: Lasco 3636-BFSC
2.
ANSI Z124.2 molded cast acrylic, nominal inside dimension 36x36.
Backside fire rating of "A" and flame spread rating of 25.
3.
Factory installed components with additional back reinforcing,
4.
Integral molded soap/shampoo shelf at 44" above floor, along back wall.
5.
Pre-drilled for valve and hand held shower head.
6.
1-1/2 inch OD grab bars.
7.
Fold up wheel chair transfer seat with phenolic slats to meet
ANSI A-1171.1.
8.
Curtain rod, shower curtain, shower drain.
9.
120V Dome light.
10.
Pressure balanced mixing valve and handheld shower assembly.
15440 - 5
2.10
2.11
P-6: LAVATORY, WALL MOUNTED – TAS
A.
Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin
1.
Manufacturer: American Standard 0124.131
2.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
Kohler
b)
Eljer
3.
ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory 19-1/4 inch x 17-1/4
inch, Ledge-back, 4 inch centers, rectangular basin with splash lip, rear
overflow, and soap depression.
4.
Mount with rim height at 32 inches.
B.
Supply Fitting:
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
Moen model 8215F05
b)
No Exceptions
2.
ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass, wrist blade handles, color
indicators, 0.5 gpm vandal resistant aerator, ceramic cartridges, , open
grid strainer.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with
escutcheon.
2.
Offset waste with perforated open strainer
3.
Wheel handle ¼ turn stops.
4.
Flexible supplies.
5.
True-Bro handicap insulation kit.
D.
Wall Mounted Carrier:
1.
Manufacturer: Wade W-520
2.
ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor
and wall attachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, concealed arm
supports, bearing plate and studs.
P-7: SCIENCE LAB STATION
A.
Millwork/Fixture provided and installed by others. Contractor shall provide and
install accessories and indicated below.
1.
Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with
escutcheon.
2.
Wheel handle ¼ turn stops.
3.
Flexible supplies.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of
fixtures.
B.
Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of
counter top lavatories and sinks.
15440 - 6
3.2
3.3
3.4
PREPARATION
A.
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated
in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
B.
Verify rough-in heights before installation. Secure ruling on heights of TAS
fixtures before rough-in.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers,
and escutcheons.
C.
Install components level and plumb.
D.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers and bolts.
E.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant
F.
Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not
intended hold fixture in place.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
3.5
3.6
TAS COMPLIANCE
A.
Obtain ruling on mounting heights of all fixtures.
B.
Mount flush valves for TAS compliant fixtures so the handle is facing the open
portion of the stall.
C.
Install pre-formed insulating covers on all exposed tailpieces, traps, and water
service beneath TAS compliant sinks, lavatories, etc.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,
noise, or overflow.
CLEANING
A.
3.8
Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and
openings before rough-in and installation.
Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Do not permit use of fixtures.
END OF SECTION
15440 - 7
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water Heaters.
B.
Pumps.
1.
Circulators.
REFERENCES
A.
ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
B.
ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels.
C.
NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
D.
NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
F.
UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.
G.
UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 15000: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and
connections to other equipment and piping.
2.
Provide heater type, capacity, and efficiency.
3.
Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.
4.
Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics
with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when
applicable.
5.
Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance
data.
2.
Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments,
lifting points, tappings, and drains.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and
inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot
location and telephone number.
15450 - 1
B.
1.5
1.6
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.
B.
Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity
identified.
C.
Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with
recommendations and requirements of the following organizations:
1.
American Gas Association (AGA).
2.
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
3.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4.
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI).
5.
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
6.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
D.
Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,
operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to AGA, NSF, NFPA and UL requirements for water heaters.
B.
Conform to ASME Section 8D for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat
exchangers.
C.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
1.8
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide WH 1-14 with five year manufacturer warranty.
B.
Provide WH 2-14 with fifteen year manufacturer warranty.
C.
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for in-line circulators.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS (WH 1-14)
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
AO Smith
2.
State
15450 - 2
3.
2.2
Lochinvar
B.
Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.
C.
Performance:
1.
Refer to schedule on drawings
D.
Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass
fiber; encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
E.
Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature
range from 110 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements,
enclosed controls and electrical junction box. Wire double element units so
elements do not operate simultaneously.
1.
Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve,
magnesium anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve.
COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS (WH 2-14)
A.
Manufacturer: PVI model 20 L 100A-GCL, No Exceptions.
1.
Capacity: As scheduled on the drawings
2.
Certified by American Gas Association under the ANSI Z2110.3 test
standard.
3.
Bear the ASME "H" stamp
4.
National Board listed for 160 psi working pressure.
5.
Minimum of 84% thermal efficiency.
B.
Construction:
1.
The water heater will be a vertical fire tube, design that is constructed
and stamped in accordance with Section IV, Part HLW of the ASME
code. Water heater will be National Board Registered for a working
pressure of 150 psi and will be pressure tested at 1-1/2 times working
pressure.
2.
Water heater will be a single-pass, down-fired, fire tube design contained
within an integral storage tank.
3.
Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be unlined. Lined or plated
water heaters will not be acceptable.
4.
Tank, combustion chamber and fire tubes will be constructed from phasebalanced austenitic and ferritic duplex steel with a chemical structure
containing a minimum of 21% chromium to prevent corrosion and mill
certified per ASTM A 923Methods A to ensure that the product is free of
detrimental chemical precipitation that affects corrosion resistance. The
material selected shall be tested and certified to pass stress chloride
cracking test protocols as defined in ISO 3651-2and ASTM G123 00(2005) “Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion
Cracking of Stainless Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling
Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.”
5.
Tank will be welded utilizing joint designs to minimize volume of weld
deposit and heat input. All heat affected zones (HAZ) shall be processed
after welding to ensure the HAZ corrosion resistance is consistent with
the mill condition base metal chemical composition. Weld procedures
15450 - 3
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
C.
(amperage, volts, welding speed, filler metals and shielding gases)
utilized shall result in a narrow range of austenite-ferrite microstructure
content consistent with phase balanced objectives for welds, HAZ and the
base metal.
All internal and external tank surfaces shall undergo full immersion
passivation and pickling processing to meet critical temperature, duration
and chemical concentration controls required to complete corrosion
resistance restoration of pressure vessel surfaces. Other passivation and
pickling methods are not accepted. Immersion passivation and pickling
certification documents are required and shall be provided with each
product.
Materials shall meet ASME Section II material requirements and be
accepted by NSF 61 for municipal potable water systems. Storage tank
materials shall contain more than 80% post-consumer recycled materials
and be 100% recyclable.
All water contacting tank surfaces will be non-porous and exhibit 0%
water absorption.
All tank connections/fittings will be non-ferrous or stainless steel.
To preserve thermal efficiency, the water heater will not use or require a
circulator piped from the hot water outlet to the cold water inlet of the
heater for the purpose of temperature control during normal operation.
Connection for a building return circulation line will be made to a
dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the
cold inlet piping. Connection to a sidearm tank, if used, will be made to a
dedicated hot return fitting at the center of the storage vessel and not the
cold inlet piping.
Finished vessel will not require sacrificial anode rods and none will be
used. Water heaters or sidearm storage tanks that employ anode rods of
any type will not be acceptable.
Combustion will be provided by a premix, fan-assisted surface burner
with a gas train meeting UL, ANSI and FM standards for the input
specified.
Burner will be stainless steel.
Gas train components will capable of self-proportionating gas and air to
maintain optimum combustion in response to varying vent pressures.
Burner shall be fixed input.
Burner NOx emissions will be less than 20 ppm when corrected to 3%
oxygen.
Water heater will be a category IV, condensing appliance and vent
through PVC or Polypropylene. Water heater will satisfy requirements for
sealed combustion. Vents for inlet air and exhaust can terminate in
different pressure zones.
Trim:
1.
The heater will be equipped with the following:
a)
Electronic flame monitoring
b)
Electronic low water cutoff
c)
An immersion operating control
d)
An immersion UL listed temperature limiting device
e)
An ASME- rated temperature and pressure relief valve
15450 - 4
2.
D.
2.3
2.4
Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of UL 795 and
FM
Accessories:
1.
Water heater shall be provided with concentric vent kit and condensate
neutralizer.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
State
2.
Amtrol
3.
AO Smith
B.
IAPMO certified, welded steel construction with butyl rubber diaphragm, suitable
for potable water installation, 150 psig maximum working pressure, ¾” mpt
connection, 5 year warranty.
IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Grundfos
2.
Bell and Gossett
3.
Taco
4.
Armstrong
B.
Casing: Bronze, rated for 145 psig working pressure.
C.
Impeller: Stainless Steel.
D.
Shaft: Aluminum Oxide Ceramic and supported by two radial bearings mounted
in a stainless steel bearing plate and rotor can.
E.
Motor: cooled and lubricated by the pumped fluid and shall require no scheduled
maintenance.
F.
Performance:
1.
Refer to drawings for schedule
G.
Provide a manual starter and aquastat to cycle the pump on a 20 degree F.
temperature drop.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA,
NSF, NFPA 54, UL requirements.
B.
Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and
electrical work to achieve operating system.
C.
Domestic Water Heaters:
15450 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
3.2
Support vent and intake piping independently of water heater.
Extend discharge from T&P valve to floor drain.
Connect gas piping to water heaters with gas cock, dirt leg and union.
Make final connection with flexible gas piping.
Install isolation valves on inlet and discharge of water heater. Provide
unions at connection to water heater. Provide heat trap in water
connections on systems which are not circulated.
Install expansion tanks on system with circulators. Install expansion tanks
between cold water inlet check valve and heater.
Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and
electrical work to achieve operating system.
Pumps:
1.
Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized
soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge.
2.
Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers.
3.
Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump
casings.
4.
Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without
vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual
operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published
maximum efficiency curve.
CLEANING
A.
Clean all construction debris and dust from equipment rooms. Leave equipment
clean. Blow out all construction dust from all internal portions of equipment,
control cabinets, pump motors, and burners.
END OF SECTION
15450 - 6
SECTION 15535
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping.
B.
Moisture and liquid indicators.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
REFERENCES
A.
ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
B.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings.
C.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.
D.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Refrigerant piping system to connect outdoor condensing unit with indoor fan coil
unit.
B.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.5 unless
indicated otherwise.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.6
Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation.
Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in
place.
B.
Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving
end caps and plugs in place until installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
A.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
15535-1
2.
2.2
Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with
melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.
REFRIGERANT
A.
Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34;
1.
R-410a,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and
maintain gradient.
B.
Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope
piping one percent in direction of oil return. Install piping to allow for expansion
and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
C.
Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and
provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in
direction of flow.
D.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
E.
Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
F.
Insulate piping; refer to Section 15080
G.
Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for
disposal of refrigerant.
H.
Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
B.
Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27
inches vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch. Test to no leakage.
END OF SECTION
15535-2
SECTION 15775
DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM COOLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Section includes indoor fan coil unit, outdoor condensing unit and controller.
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation: Execution requirements for insulation
specified by this section.
B.
Section 15535: Refrigeration Piping and Specialties
REFERENCES
A.
ARI 410 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute) - Forced-Circulation
Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
B.
UL 1096 (ANSI/Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Electric Central Air Heating
Equipment.
C.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Submit coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows,
connections, and rough-in dimensions.
2.
Submit mechanical and electrical service locations, capacities and
requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1.
Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation with
additional compressor warranty for six (6) years from date of installation.
15775 - 1
1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING CASSETTE DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Mitsubishi
2.
LG
B.
Capacity: Refer to schedule on the drawings.
C.
General:
1.
System consist of a space saving ceiling cassette indoor unit and
matching outdoor unit.
2.
Units listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.
3.
All wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).
4.
Units rated in accordance with ARI Standard 240 and bear the ARI label.
5.
Provided with full charge of R-410a for 70 feet of refrigerant tubing
provided in the outdoor unit.
6.
Dry nitrogen holding charge provided in the evaporator.
7.
SEER meet or exceed 1992 Federal Standards.
D.
Indoor Unit
1.
Factory assembled and wired.
2.
Unit shall be wall mounted with factory provided plate.
3.
Evaporator fan:
a)
high performance, fan direct driven by a single motor.
b)
Statically and dynamically balanced with permanently lubricated
bearings.
4.
Filter:
a)
Return air long-life filter to provide approximately 2,500 hours of
use in a normal office environment before cleaning.
5.
Coil:
a)
nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper
tubing.
b)
Tubing has inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.
c)
All tube joints brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.
d)
Coil pressure tested at the factory.
6.
Condensate Drain:
a)
Unit shall be provided with factory installed condensate lift pump.
E.
Outdoor Unit
1.
completely factory assembled, piped, and wired.
2.
Casing fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked
enamel.
3.
Unit furnished with direct drive, propeller type fans arranged for horizontal
discharge.
4.
Motors have inherent protection, permanently lubricated type, resiliently
mounted for quiet operation.
15775 - 2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
F.
Fans provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
Compressor:
a)
high-performance rotary type with crankcase heater, accumulator
and internal thermal overloads.
b)
mounted to avoid transmission of vibration.
Refrigeration system equipped with high pressure switch and have the
capability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and
overall refrigerant tubing length of 164 feet between indoor and outdoor
sections without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil.
Refrigerant flow from the condenser controlled by means of a capillary
tube.
Condenser coil nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to
copper tubing.
Coil protected with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing.
Coil protected with an integral metal guard.
Unit controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor matching
units.
Built-in, low-ambient controller with allow cooling to 0 degrees F outdoor
temperature.
Control System
1.
Consist of two (2) microprocessors interconnected by a single non-polar
two wire cable as supplied.
2.
Unit mounted microprocessor
a)
factory wired and located within the indoor unit
b)
capability of sensing return air temperature and indoor coil
temperature
c)
receive and process commands from the remote controller
d)
provide emergency operation
e)
control the outdoor unit.
3.
Wall Mounted microprocessor
a)
within the wall mounted remote controller
b)
provide automatic cooling;
c)
display set point and room temperature;
d)
24 hour on/off timer so that automatic operation can be set on the
timer at one hour intervals from one to twenty-four hours;
e)
self-diagnostic function display;
f)
check mode for memory of most recent problem;
g)
control operation of the air sweep louvers;
h)
provide on-off and system/mode function switching.
i)
heating system shall be controlled so that only warm air is
discharge whenever the fan speed exceeds the very low (VLO)
speed.
j)
booster heater on line only when the difference between the set
point and room temperature exceeds 5.4 degrees.
k)
Heating switched back to the heat pump only when the difference
drops back to less than 3.6 degrees.
l)
Normal operation of the remote controller provides individual
system control in which one remote controller and one indoor unit
are installed in the same room.
4.
Control Voltage
15775 - 3
a)
b)
c)
d)
between the remote controller and the indoor unit is 12 volts, D.C.
between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is 12 volts D.C.
Both 12VDC capable of automatic restart when power is restored
after power interruption.
System includes twenty function self diagnostics including total
hours of compressor run time.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Support indoor unit from structure as directed by manufacturer in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B.
Install outdoor unit on roof platform as detailed. Shim unit level and secure to
platform. Install unit on neoprene pads.
C.
Provide and install shop fabricated expanded metal hail screens to cover
condenser coil.
D.
Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.
E.
Install refrigerant lines as directed by the manufacturer. Insulate suction lines
along their entire length. Secure refrigerant lines and provide proper support.
Make connections to indoor and outdoor unit – check for leaks.
F.
Provide condensate drain connection for cooling coils. Extend as indicated on the
drawings to drain. Provide pipe supports from structure and slope down in
direction of flow. Insulate condensate drain line.
G.
Install wiring in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
H.
Install remote controller in location shown. Terminate all control wiring.
I.
Set DIP switches on units. Demonstrate to Owner/User. Coordinate settings with
User’s requirements.
CLEANING
A.
After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of
units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.
B.
Clean filters.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Demonstrate operation to Owner/User.
END OF SECTION
15775 - 4
SECTION 15781
PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Packaged roof top gas/electric air conditioning units.
B.
Roof mounting curb and base.
REFERENCES
A.
ARI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.
B.
ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 15000.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Indicate capacity of manufactured products and assemblies specific to
this project.
2.
Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
3.
Indicate dimensions, weights and duct connections of each unit.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1.
Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include
start-up instructions.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions,
installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
C.
Manufacturer’s Installation Quality Check-Off form:
1.
Contractor to complete for each unit installed.
2.
Bind in folder, indicating project site. Submit with O&M data.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
15781-1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
1.7
Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs
are in place, ready for immediate installation of units.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide one year parts and labor warranty for each unit.
B.
Provide additional four year warranty for compressors.
C.
Provide ten year warranty on gas fired heat exchanger.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONVERTIBLE GAS/ELECTRIC PACKAGED UNITS – 3 THRU 10 TONS:
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Trane
2.
Carrier
3.
Lennox
B.
General:
1.
Convertible discharge units
2.
Minimum Efficiency ratings:
a)
3 ton: 17.0 SEER
b)
7-1/2 ton: 12.6 EER
3.
Factory assembled, single-piece, outdoor packaged unit, electricallycontrolled heating and cooling unit utilizing a hermetic compressor for
cooling duty, and gas combustion for heating duty.
4.
Units are factory wired, fully charged with refrigerant charge (R-410a),
and 100% run tested before leaving factory.
5.
Cooling performance rated in accordance with ARI Standards 210/240 or
360 and 270.
a)
Unit capable of starting and running at 115 F ambient outdoor
temperature, meeting maximum load criteria of ARI Standard
210/240 or 360.
b)
Compressor with standard control capable of operation down to
40 deg F ambient outdoor temperature.
6.
Wiring internal to unit colored and numbered
7.
UL-tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards, UL
1995 and CSA No. 236-M90.
C.
Unit Cabinet:
1.
Constructed of zinc coated heavy gauge galvanized steel, coated with a
baked enamel finish.
2.
All panels insulated with minimum 1/2 inch thick foil faced glass fiber
insulation. Unit base insulated with 1/2 inch 1 pound density closed cell
insulation.
Unit top:
3.
a)
One piece construction or seamed with double-hemmed and
gasket sealed construction
15781-2
4.
5.
6.
Unit base:
a)
For water integrity, unit base pan constructed of one piece
material or with liquid tight welded seams. Duct penetrations have
minimum 1 inch high curb built into base pan.
Hinged Access Doors:
a)
Provide factory installed hinges on Filter/Evaporator Access Door,
Indoor Fan/Heat Exchanger Door, and Compressor Control
Access Door
Holes provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to facilitate
maneuvering and overhead rigging.
D.
Fans:
1.
Evaporator Fan:
a)
Fan wheel: steel double-inlet, forward-curved blades with
corrosion-resistant finish
b)
Fans are dynamically balanced.
c)
Direct drive with multi-speed motors for 3 ton units.
d)
Belt drive with adjustable sheaves for 7-1/2 ton units. Provide with
adjustable idler arm assembly.
e)
Motor:
1)
Permanently lubricated with built-in overload protection.
2)
Meet US Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT)
2.
Condenser Fan
a)
Direct-driven propeller type, draw through configuration, vertical
air discharge.
b)
Construction: aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel
spiders, dynamically balanced.
c)
Motor:
1)
Permanently lubricated with built-in overload protection.
2)
Meet US Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT)
3.
Induced-draft blower:
a)
direct-driven, single inlet, forward-curved centrifugal type, made
from steel with a corrosion-resistant finish, dynamically balanced.
E.
Compressor:
1.
Hermetically sealed, direct drive, scroll type
2.
Built in internal over current, over temperature protection as standard.
3.
Provide with centrifugal oil pump.
4.
Compressors resiliently mounted on neoprene isolators.
F.
Refrigerant circuit:
1.
Provide with Thermal Expansion valves, service pressure ports, and
refrigerant line filter driers
G.
Coils:
1.
Evaporator and condenser coils: aluminum plate fins mechanically
bonded to copper tubes with all joints brazed.
2.
Tube sheet openings belled to prevent tube wear.
3.
Evaporator coil: full face active design.
4.
Evaporator tested at 250 psig; condenser coil tested to 400 psig.
5.
Double sloped condensate drain pan under evaporator section
15781-3
H.
Heating Section:
1.
Induced-draft combustion type with energy saving direct-spark ignition
system and redundant main gas valve.
2.
Tubular-section type constructed of a minimum of 20-gage steel coated
with a nominal 1.2 mil aluminum-silicone alloy for corrosion resistance.
3.
Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel.
4.
All gas piping shall enter the unit cabinet at a single location.
I.
Controls and Safeties:
1.
Unit provided with self-contained low-voltage control circuit protected by
an auto-reset device.
2.
Heating section provided with the following minimum protections:
a)
High-temperature limit switch.
b)
Induced-draft motor speed sensor.
c)
Flame rollout switch.
d)
Flame proving controls.
J.
Filter Sections:
1.
Factory-installed, low velocity, throwaway 2 inch thick fiberglass filters of
commercially available sizes.
2.
Provide each rooftop unit with complete set of 2 inch thick pleated filters
to be installed after construction is completed.
K.
Roof Curb:
1.
Roof curb designed to conform to NRCA Standards.
2.
Formed galvanized steel with wood nailer strip and capable of supporting
entire unit weight.
3.
Allows for installing and securing ductwork to curb prior to mounting unit
on the curb.
4.
Curbs configured so that the unit will be level when installed on the roof.
Make necessary provisions when installing curb to allow for level
installation.
5.
RTU 1-14 shall be provided with metal building roof curb to match slope
and style of roof. Coordinate with the architectural and general
contractor.
L.
Outside air provisions:
1.
Provide RTU 2-14 with motorized damper to allow for up to 50% outside
air – manually set at installation.
2.
Provide RTU 1-14 with outdoor Economizer with 0-100 percent, fully
modulating opposed blade dampers with electric actuator.
a)
Provide with minimum position setting device, preset linkage and
wiring harness with plug.
b)
Fixed Dry bulb control.
M.
Powered Exhaust (RTU 1-14)
1.
Direct driven propeller fan mounted at return air plenum.
2.
Field wired to unit power supply.
N.
Condenser Coil Hail Guard Assembly:
1.
Close mesh design to prevent small hail from penetrating the screen.
15781-4
2.
Stand off from the condenser coils by at least one inch.
O.
Electrical Access with Disconnect Switch:
1.
Factory installed 3 pole molded case disconnect switch with provisions for
through the base electrical connections.
2.
Disconnect switch installed inside unit with water tight enclosure with
access through swinging door.
3.
Factory wired from switch to high voltage terminal block.
4.
Switch sized per NEC and UL.
5.
Switch UL/CSA agency recognized.
6.
Un-powered Convenience Outlet
a)
Factory installed GFCI, 120 VAC, 2 plug convenience outlet
P.
Controls:
1.
Provide units with Honeywell touch screen 7-day programmable
thermostats as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated
on shop drawings and illustrated by the manufacturer.
B.
Verify that proper power supply is available.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A.
C.
Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to
protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level, regardless
of roof slope.
D.
Install a type L copper p-trap in the condensate connection of each cooling coil.
Discharge condensate into 18x18x6 galvanized steel drain pan.
E.
Hail screens shall be installed on unit when unit is installed on the roof.
F.
Set limits on motorized outside air damper for required outside air.
G.
Provide initial start-up, including routine servicing and check-out.
CLEANING
A.
After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of
units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.
B.
Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish
materials furnished by manufacturer.
15781-5
C.
Install new filters.
END OF SECTION
15781-6
SECTION 15810
DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes metal ductwork and nonmetallic ductwork.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 9 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for Weld
priming, weather resistant, paint or coating specified by this section.
2.
Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for
hangers, supports and sleeves for placement by this section.
3.
Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for duct
liner for placement by this section.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.
B.
ASTM A568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled.
C.
ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and
Strip, Commercial Quality.
D.
NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems.
E.
NFPA 90B (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Warm Air
Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
F.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
G.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
H.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
I.
UL 181 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Factory-Made Air Ducts and
Connectors.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
No variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower
loss coefficient is permitted except by written permission.
B.
Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with
ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.
15810- 1
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000: Submittal procedures.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested,
test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures for glass fiber
ducts.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
1.8
1.9
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.
Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and flexible.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum five years experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
five years experience.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended
by sealant manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
DUCT MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Ducts: G90 or better galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming
quality (LFQ), chem treat.
B.
Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.
15810- 2
2.3
B.
Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
C.
All duct sizes indicated on the drawings are clear inside dimensions. Increase
sheet metal size as required to accommodate duct liner where required. Refer to
Section 15080.
D.
Transverse duct joints: Refer to manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge,
intermediate reinforcement size and spacing and joint reinforcements.
1.
TDC (T-25a) / TDF (T-25b) / T-24 joints are not acceptable for duct
pressure classes over 2 in w.g. or duct sizes over 40 inches.
E.
Make longitudinal seams with appropriate lock joint, sealed with mastic sealant.
1.
Use Pittsburgh lock on fittings
2.
Snaplock allowed on straight duct joints. Secure each end of joint with
sheet metal screw.
F.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline
duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide
turning vanes.
1.
Harper double wall turning vanes fabricated from same material as duct.
2.
Tab spacing in conformance with SMACNA Standard. Use all tabs.
G.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever
possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45
degrees convergence downstream.
H.
Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated
where 90-degree conical tee connections may be used.
I.
All ductwork shall be minimally sealed as defined for a Class C sealant class,
according to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, regardless of actual
pressure class. Class A and Class B sealant classes still apply to applicable
pressure classes.
TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Ductmate
B.
Application:
1.
Ducts where either dimension is 30 inches or larger.
C.
SMACNA "E" rated, SMACNA "F" rated or SMACNA "J" rated rigidity class
connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant,
gasket, cleats, and corner clips.
1.
Gasket meets Mil-C 18969B, Type II Class B.
15810- 3
2.4
INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
A.
2.5
UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive
supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene
vapor barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative.
2.
Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.
SEALERS
A.
Flexible water based adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure duct
systems.
B.
UL Listed and conforming to ASTM E 84.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
3.4
Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene
on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C.
Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining
round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller.
D.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
E.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands plus adhesive.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers
and controllers. Provide Pitot tube openings where required for testing of
systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against
air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation
material inside a metal ring.
B.
Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with three feet maximum length of
flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
CLEANING
A.
Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that
may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide
adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
15810- 4
3.5
3.6
DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING
A.
Test ductwork prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, and other taps.
B.
All leak testing to be witnessed by the engineer. Provide 72 hours notice prior to
testing.
C.
Perform testing on first section of ductwork installed to verify quality of
workmanship before majority of ductwork is installed.
D.
Perform testing in accordance with HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
1.
Use a certified orifice tube for measuring leakage.
2.
Define section of duct to be tested, blank off and seal.
3.
Determine percentage of system being tested.
4.
Determine allowable leakage (cfm) for the section being tested, in
relation to the percentage of the duct being tested.
5.
Pressurize to operating pressure and repair and significant or audible
leak.
6.
Re-pressurize and measure leakage.
7.
Repeat until measured leakage is less than allowable leakage.
ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE
A.
3.7
Constant Volume Systems
1.
Supply Ductwork
2.
Operating Pressure: 0-2 inches wg
a)
Allowable leakage: 2 percent of design CFM
SCHEDULES
DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Supply
Galvanized Steel
Return
Galvanized Steel
General Exhaust
Galvanized Steel
DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
PRESSURE CLASS
Supply
2 inch wg
Return
2 inch wg
General Exhaust
2 inch wg
END OF SECTION
15810- 5
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems.
B.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies including volume
control dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes, and hardware used. Include
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.5
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.7
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum five years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Section includes volume control dampers, flexible duct connections and duct test
holes.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.
15820- 1
2.2
B.
Rectangular Manual Damper: Ruskin MD15
1.
Up to 36 inches x 12 inches: 22 gage galvanized steel frame, 22 gage
galvanized steel blade with center V groove for reinforcement, 3/8 inch
square shaft, with molded synthetic bearings and 2 inch stand off
bracket.
2.
Over 36 inches x 12 inches: 18 gauge galvanized steel formed hat
channel frame, 18 gauge galvanized steel single skin blade with 3
longitudinal grooves for reinforcement, hexagonal steel shaft locked into
damper blade, with molded synthetic bearings and 2 inch stand off
bracket.
C.
Round In-Line Butterfly dampers: Flexmaster or Buckley
1.
Flexmaster Model SLB03 manual damper.
2.
Constructed of 26 ga. G-90 galvanized steel with 3/8 inch square shaft
and nylon bushings.
3.
Overall length – 7 inches
4.
Round outlet fabricated with rolled stiffener bead for strength.
5.
Provide with 2 inch stand-off brackets and locking hand quadrant.
D.
Round Runout Balancing Dampers:
1.
Flexmaster or Buckley.
2.
Equal to Flexmaster STOD dampers with insulation build out brackets.
3.
Constructed of 26 ga. G-90 galvanized steel with 3/8 inch square shaft
and nylon bushings.
4.
Round outlet fabricated with rolled stiffener bead for strength.
5.
Provide with 2 inch stand-off brackets and locking hand quadrant.
E.
Quadrants:
1.
Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade
dampers.
2.
On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting
brackets, bases, or adapters.
F.
Concealed Damper Operators:
1.
On ducts behind non-removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction
that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, provide
devices equal to Young Regulator Co. 927C miter gear with 315
concealed regulator.
FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.
B.
Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1.
Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric
conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
2.
Net Fabric Width: Approximately 6 inches wide.
3.
Metal: 3 inch, 24 gage galvanized steel
15820- 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.
B.
Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.
APPLICATION
A.
3.3
Provide and install a manual balancing damper in every runout to individual
diffusers.
INSTALLATION.
A.
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct
construction and pressure class.
B.
Install manual balancing dampers in round duct runouts with shaft horizontal,
parallel with air stream.
C.
Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing
purposes.
END OF SECTION
15820- 3
SECTION 15830
FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes roof exhausts, packaged propeller fans, motors, drives and
accessories.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for power
ventilators for placement by this section.
2.
Section 15810 - Ducts: Product requirements for hangers for placement
by this section.
3.
Section 15820 Duct Accessories: Product requirements for Back-draft
Dampers for placement by this section.
REFERENCES
A.
ABMA STD 9 (American Boiler Manufacturers Association) - Load Ratings and
Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B.
ABMA STD 11 (American Boiler Manufacturers Association) - Load Ratings and
Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C.
AMCA 99 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Standards Handbook.
D.
AMCA 210 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating.
E.
AMCA 300 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Reverberant Room Method
for Sound Testing of Fans.
F.
AMCA 301 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
G.
NEMA MG1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Motors and
Generators.
H.
UL 705 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Power Ventilators.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000: Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate size and configuration of fan assembly, mountings,
weights, ductwork and accessory connections.
C.
Product Data: Submit data on all fans and accessories including fan curves with
specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for
both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
15830- 1
1.4
D.
Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for at
least five blade settings, including maximum.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturers instructions.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
three years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place,
bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
1.9
Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and
drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for fans.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Loren Cook
2.
Greenheck
3.
Twin City Fans
B.
Product Requirements:
1.
Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA
Certified Rating Seal.
2.
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA
Certified Sound Rating Seal.
3.
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
15830- 2
4.
UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and
tested in accordance with UL 705.
C.
General:
1.
Roof exhaust fans are centrifgual, belt-driven type.
2.
Construction of the fan housing is heavy gauge aluminum.
3.
Include built in lifting lugs incorporated into the frame of the fan.
D.
Housing:
1.
All spun parts shall have a rolled bead for added rigidity
2.
Spun so as to seal the pores of the aluminum providing greater
resistance against oxidation and deterioration.
3.
Removable top cap with stainless steel quick release catches.
E.
Fan
1.
2.
3.
F.
Motor and Drive
1.
Motor enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separate from the
exhaust airstream.
2.
Air for cooling the motor shall be supplied to the motor compartment by
way of an air passage, from an area free of contaminated exhaust fumes.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G.
Fan wheel is all-aluminum, centrifugal blower type with backward inclined
blades and a tapered inlet shroud.
Wheels are statically and dynamically balanced.
Inlet cone of aluminum.
Motors: heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing type.
Drives: heavy duty cast iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts,
variable pitch
Fan shaft: steel construction, turned, ground and polished to precise
tolerances in relationship to the hub and bearings.
Drive belts: oil-resistant, non-static, non-sparking type with life
expectancy of over 24,000 hours.
Bearings: flanged and of the permanently lubricated, permanently sealed,
ball bearing type capable of over 200,000 hours bearing life.
The entire drive assembly and wheel shall be removable, as a complete
unit, from the support structure without disassembling the external fan
housing.
The complete drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration
isolation.
Direct drive units
a)
Identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts,
and fan shaft bearings.
b)
Type B construction.
Accessories:
1.
Roof Curb: 12 inch galvanized steel with continuously welded seams,
built-in cant strips, one inch insulation and curb bottom and factory
installed nailer strip.
2.
Disconnect Switch: Factory-wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal
overload protected motor.
15830- 3
3.
4.
2.2
Back-draft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade
construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades
linked.
Factory wired fan speed controller.
WALL PACKAGED PROPELLER FANS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Loren Cook
2.
Greenheck
3.
Twin City Fans
B.
UL listed (UL 705) and AMCA certified
C.
Construction.
1.
Impeller: Shaped steel blade with heavy duty minimum 7 gauge hub,
statically and dynamically balanced, keyed and locked to shaft with two
set screws, provided with V-belt drive.
2.
Frame: Minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly bolted to minimum 14
gauge wall panel with continuously welded corners and integral venturi.
3.
Finish: electrostatically applied baked polyester powder coating
4.
Bearings: Heavy duty regreaseable ball bearings in cast iron pillow block
housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at
maximum operating speed.
5.
Drives: machined cast iron, keyed and secured to fan and motor shaft,
sized for 150 percent of installed motor horsepower. Provide unit with
rotary belt tensioner.
6.
Motor: heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings.
D.
Accessories:
1.
Outlet Damper: Multiple blade with offset hinge pin, blades linked, line
voltage motor drive, power open, spring return.
2.
Safety Screens: Expanded galvanized metal over inlet, motor, and drive;
to comply with OSHA regulations.
3.
Disconnect Switch: factory installed and wired.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.
B.
Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure
metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between
ductwork and fan while running.
C.
Provide sheaves required for final air balance.
D.
Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
E.
Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in
place, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
15830- 4
F.
Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb
G.
Roof mounted fans to be installed level. Shim curb as required, regardless of
roof slope.
H.
Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof
opening.
I.
Install backdraft dampers on roof and wall exhausters.
END OF SECTION
15830- 5
SECTION 15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section includes diffusers, registers/grilles, and louvers
REFERENCES
A.
ADC 1062 (Air Diffusion Council) - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B.
AMCA 500 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers,
Dampers and Shutters.
C.
ASHRAE 70 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers) - Method of Testing for Rating the Airflow Performance of Outlets
and Inlets.
D.
SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 15000 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data outlets and inlets sizes, finish, and type of mounting
prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size,
location, application, and noise level.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers
1.
Titus
2.
Ruskin
3.
Metalaire
4.
EH Price
5.
Kruegar
B.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling
air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated;
15850 - 1
constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for
complete installation.
2.2
C.
Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature
and velocity traverses and throw and pressure drop, and noise criteria ratings for
each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data in accordance with ARI
Standards.
D.
Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are specifically
manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support.
Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling
systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser. Field verify existing
conditions and ceiling type for renovation work that does not require complete
ceiling replacement.
E.
Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, performance and with
accessories and finishes as listed on Air Distribution Schedule, or approved
equal.
F.
RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
1.
Type: Square and rectangular, multi-louvered diffuser to discharge air in
pattern as indicated on drawings.
2.
Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame
and ceiling frame.
3.
Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish.
G.
WALL SUPPLY GRILLES
1.
Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge
air along face of grille with two-way deflection.
2.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
3.
Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum
blades with factory off-white enamel finish.
H.
CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
1.
Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
2.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid
ceilings. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.
3.
Fabrication: Aluminum with factory baked enamel off-white enamel
finish.
LOUVERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Ruskin
2.
Greenheck
3.
NCA
B.
Type: 4 or 6 inch deep (as indicated on drawings) with blades on 45 degree
slope, heavy channel frame, bird screen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust
and 3/4 inch for intake.
15850 - 2
C.
Fabrication: 12 gage thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory
anodized finish. Color to be selected by architect.
D.
Mounting: Furnish with exterior angle flange for installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify inlet/outlet locations.
B.
Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
B.
Provide rigid elbows at inlet of round neck diffusers. Do not connect flexible
duct directly to diffusers.
C.
Install return air duct directly over return air grilles. Plenums on top of return air
grilles not less than 6 inches before transition to return duct connection.
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers.
E.
Paint all exposed sheet metal, including duct liner fasteners visible behind air
outlets and inlets matte black.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position
to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
END OF SECTION
15850 - 3
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems, measurement
of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
REFERENCES
A.
AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) - National Standards for Total System
Balance.
B.
ASHRAE 111 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers) - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
C.
NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau) - Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System
Balance forms, or NEBB Report forms.
B.
Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,
adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified
performance.
C.
Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,
balancing, and equipment data required.
D.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
Provide final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and
maintenance manuals.
E.
Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs,
with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with
air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and
indicating thermostat locations.
F.
Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC
National Project Performance Guaranty or Copy of NEBB Certificate of
Conformance Certification prior to commencing system balance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field
Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural
Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems
15950- 1
1.5
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience certified by AABC or Certified by NEBB.
B.
Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer,
NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.
SEQUENCING
A.
1.7
Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of
Substantial Completion.
SERVICES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR:
A.
The Mechanical Contractor shall have all systems complete and in operational
readiness prior to TAB services.
B.
Complete operational readiness prior to commencement of TAB services shall
include the following:
1.
Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, etc. to
obtain projected operating conditions.
2.
Air Distribution Systems:
a)
Verify installation for conformity to design. All supply, return and
exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as
required by specifications.
b)
All volume dampers properly located and functional. Dampers
shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free
operation.
c)
All supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers, and diffusers
installed.
d)
Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as
heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc. shall
be blanked and/or sealed to eliminate excessive by-pass or
leakage of air.
e)
All fans (supply, exhaust) are to be operating and verified for
freedom from vibration, total air quantities.
f)
Drive belts shall be of proper size and tension. Heater elements
shall be of proper size and rating. Provide record of motor
amperage and voltage and verify that they do not exceed
nameplate ratings.
3.
Automatic Controls:
a)
Check that all control components are installed in accordance with
project requirements and are functional, including all electrical
interlock damper sequences, POC detectors.
b)
All controlling instruments calibrated and set for designed
operating conditions with the exception of the room thermostats
which shall be calibrated at the completion of test and balance.
C.
As a part of work under Division 15 the Contractor shall make any changes in
the sheaves, belts, motors and dampers as required for correct balance as
15950- 2
required by the TAB firm. The contractor under Division 15 shall make all
corrections to the mechanical installations as required to correct all deficiencies
found during the TAB.
D.
The Contractor shall provide and coordinate work under all sections of the
specifications as required to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items
or conditions found during the testing, adjusting and balancing period.
E.
In order that all systems may be properly tested, balanced and adjusted as
required herein by these specifications, the Contractor shall operate said
systems for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and
readiness for TAB and during the TAB period.
F.
Project contract completion schedules shall provide time frame allowance to
permit the completion of TAB services prior to occupancy. Provide simulated
design condition loads as necessary.
G.
Documents: The Contractor shall transmit one copy of the following records for
review and comment by the TAB firm.
1.
As-installed drawings
2.
Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
3.
Shop drawings
4.
Instructions
5.
Valve charts
H.
Permanently mark all dampers, volume controls, and other settings after TAB.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work.
Ensure the following conditions:
1.
Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4.
Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in
addition to final filters.
5.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
6.
Fans are rotating correctly.
7.
Volume dampers are in place and open.
8.
Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10.
Air outlets are installed and connected.
11.
Duct system leakage is minimized.
B.
Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance
of services, which prevent system balance.
15950- 3
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during
testing.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent
of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10
percent of design.
ADJUSTING
A.
Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices
allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or
that such disruption has been rectified.
D.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access
doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to
specified settings.
E.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report.
Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F.
Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and
submit report.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,
return, and exhaust air quantities [at site altitude].
B.
Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire
cross sectional area of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from
objectionable drafts.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that
adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect
volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.
15950- 4
3.6
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave
drive changes as required to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by
damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at
each outlet or inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil
pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50
percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust
dampers for design conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust
dampers to check leakage.
SCHEDULES
A.
3.7
Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
1.
Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units
2.
Ductless Split Systems
3.
Fans
4.
Air Inlets and Outlets
Report Forms
A.
Title Page:
1.
Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
2.
Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
3.
Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
Agency
4.
Project name
5.
Project location
6.
Project Architect
7.
Project Engineer
8.
Project Contractor
9.
Project altitude
10.
Report date
B.
Summary Comments:
1.
Design versus final performance
2.
Notable characteristics of system
3.
Description of systems operation sequence
4.
Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building
pressurization
5.
Nomenclature used throughout report
6.
Test conditions
C.
Instrument List:
1.
Instrument
2.
Manufacturer
15950- 5
3.
4.
5.
6.
Model number
Serial number
Range
Calibration date
D.
Electric Motors:
1.
Manufacturer
2.
Model/Frame
3.
HP/BHP and kW
4.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
5.
RPM
6.
Service factor
7.
Starter size, rating, heater elements
8.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
E.
V-Belt Drive:
1.
Identification/location
2.
Required driven RPM
3.
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
4.
Belt, size and quantity
5.
Motor sheave diameter and RPM
6.
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
F.
Air Cooled Condenser:
1.
Identification/number
2.
Location
3.
Manufacturer
4.
Model number
5.
Serial number
6.
Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
7.
Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
8.
Number of compressors
G.
Cooling Coil Data:
1.
Identification/number
2.
Location
3.
Service
4.
Manufacturer
5.
Air flow, design and actual
6.
Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
7.
Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
8.
Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
9.
Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
10.
Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
11.
Air pressure drop, design and actual
H.
Return Air/Outside Air Data:
1.
Identification/location
2.
Design air flow
3.
Actual air flow
4.
Design return air flow
15950- 6
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Actual return air flow
Design outside air flow
Actual outside air flow
Return air temperature
Outside air temperature
Required mixed air temperature
Actual mixed air temperature
Design outside/return air ratio
Actual outside/return air ratio
I.
Exhaust Fan Data:
1.
Location
2.
Manufacturer
3.
Model number
4.
Serial number
5.
Air flow, specified and actual
6.
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7.
Inlet pressure
8.
Discharge pressure
9.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
10.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
11.
Fan RPM
J.
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
1.
Air terminal number
2.
Room number/location
3.
Terminal type
4.
Terminal size
5.
Area factor
6.
Design velocity
7.
Design air flow
8.
Test (final) velocity
9.
Test (final) air flow
10.
Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION
15950- 7
Spearman ISD
2014 Improvements
Specifications Sections by:
Huseman Engineering, LLC
7105 W 34th, Suite E
(806)352-0484
Amarillo, TX 79109
TBPE Firm No.: F-13245
ryan@husemanengineering.com
03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete
31 63 29: Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 63 29
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Dry-installed drilled piers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternative design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.
C.
1.4
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement, detailing fabricating, bending, supporting, and placing.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: From manufacturer, for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to
remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations.
1.
Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,
adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and
utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair
damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
31 63 29 - 1
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 except as modified in this Section.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.3
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II.
a.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded, as shown on the plan nominal maximum coarseaggregate size. Provide aggregate from a single source.
1.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
D.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland
cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals.
C.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): As shown on the plans.
Air Content: Do not air entrain concrete.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
31 63 29 - 2
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
2.5
REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A.
2.6
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and
furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations.
EXCAVATION
A.
Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and
obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows:
1.
2.
Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted with soil or
rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power,
torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work.
Obstructions: Payment for removing unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other
subsurface obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock
teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque,
and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions for changes in the
Work.
B.
Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.
C.
Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of
excavation.
1.
2.
D.
Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance.
Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting.
Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable
bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect.
1.
2.
Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Architect.
Payment for additional authorized excavation is according to Contract provisions for changes in
the Work.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
31 63 29 - 3
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
E.
Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent water
seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain
stability of shaft walls.
1.
Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete placement and before
initial set of concrete, or leave temporary casings in place.
F.
Bells: Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape, base thickness, and slope angle indicated. Excavate
bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before placing concrete.
G.
Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances.
1.
3.3
If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction. Submit
corrective construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
C.
Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.
D.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain
minimum cover over reinforcement.
E.
Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other
Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete
placement.
F.
Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and
exposure to weather.
3.4
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and
approval of shaft by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft
or steel reinforcement.
1.
2.
C.
Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place concrete with
chutes, tremies, or pumps.
Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete.
Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60-inch head
of concrete above bottom of casing.
1.
Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
31 63 29 - 4
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
D.
Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above
the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation.
E.
Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause
physical damage or reduced strength.
1.
2.
F.
3.5
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators.
If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place
concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90 deg F.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement.
1.
C.
Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have
been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing
capacities are determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data
are determined by Architect.
Concrete Tests and Inspections: ASTM C 172/C 172M except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94/C 94M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test
but no fewer than one test for each concrete load.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive-strength test unless otherwise indicated. Mold and store cylinders for laboratorycured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; one set for each drilled pier but not more than
one set for each truck load. Test one specimen at seven days, test two specimens at 28 days, and
retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.
If frequency of testing provides fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct
tests from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture is satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressivestrength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
Report test results in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours
of testing. List Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of
concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength,
and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests in reports of compressive-strength tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
31 63 29 - 5
Spearman ISD- 2014 Improvements
10.
11.
D.
3.6
Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the
Contract Documents.
An excavation, concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 31 63 29
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
31 63 29 - 6